2017 Jeep Patriot User's Guide

2017 PATRIOT USER GUIDE

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the

Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or

www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);

www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).

Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Whether it’s providing

information about speciﬁc

product features, taking a

tour through your vehicle’s

heritage, knowing what

steps to take following an accident,

or scheduling your next appointment,

we know you’ll ﬁnd the app an

important extension of your Jeep

brand vehicle. Simply download the

app, select your make and model and

enjoy the ride. To get this app, go

directly to the App Store or Google

Play and enter the search keyword

“JEEP” (U.S. market only).

jeep.com /en /owners provides

special oers tailored to your

needs, customized vehicle galleries,

personalized service records and

more. To get this information, just

create an account and check

back often.

17MK74-926-AA

Patriot

Third Edition

User Guide

2667646_17c_Patriot_UG_082616.indd 1 8/26/16 2:07 PM

If you are the ﬁrst registered retail

owner of your vehicle, you may

obtain a complimentary printed copy

of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/

Uconnect Manuals or Warranty

Booklets by calling 1 877 426-5337

(U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada)

or by contacting your dealer.

The driver’s primary responsibility is

the safe operation of the vehicle.

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, resulting in a

collision and personal injury. FCA US

LLC strongly recommends that the

driver use extreme caution when

using any device or feature that may

take their attention o the road.

Use of any electrical devices, such

as cellular telephones, computers,

portable radios, vehicle navigation

or other devices, by the driver

while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous and could lead to a

serious collision. Texting while

driving is also dangerous and

should never be done while the

vehicle is moving.

If you ﬁnd yourself unable to

devote your full attention to vehicle

operation, pull o the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

Some states or provinces prohibit

the use of cellular telephones or

texting while driving. It is always

the driver’s responsibility to comply

with all local laws.

Important:

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the

important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,

Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be

found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website

on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you ﬁnd it

useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement DVD kits by

visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can

purchase replacement DVD kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.

This guide has been prepared to help you

get quickly acquainted with your new Jeep

brand vehicle and to provide a convenient

reference source for common questions.

However, it is not a substitute for your

Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions,

maintenance procedures and important

safety messages, please consult your

Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect

manuals found on the website on the back

cover and other Warning Labels

in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide

may apply to your vehicle. For additional

information on accessories to help

personalize your vehicle, visit

www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca

(Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.

Driving and Alcohol:

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your

driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below

the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated

non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less

sharp, your reﬂexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

2667646_17c_Patriot_UG_082616.indd 2 8/26/16 2:07 PM

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA

US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that

it represents precision workmanship, distinc-

tive styling, and high quality.

Your new FCA US LLC vehicle has character-

istics to enhance the driver's control under

some driving conditions. These are to assist

the driver and are never a substitute for

attentive driving. They can never take the

driver's place. Always drive carefully.

Your new vehicle has many features for the

comfort and convenience of you and your

passengers. Some of these should not be

used when driving because they take your

eyes from the road or your attention from

driving. Never text while driving, or more than

momentarily take your eyes off the road.

This guide illustrates and describes the op-

eration of features and equipment that are

either standard or optional on this vehicle.

This guide may also include a description of

features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle.

Please disregard any features and equipment

described in this guide that are not available

on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to

make changes in design and specifications

and/or make additions to or improvements to

its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previ-

ously manufactured.

This User Guide has been prepared to help

you quickly become acquainted with the im-

portant features of your vehicle. It contains

most things you will need to operate and

maintain the vehicle, including emergency

information.

For complete owner information, refer to your

Owner's Manual at

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further

details. For your convenience, the informa-

tion contained on this site may also be

printed and saved for future reference.

FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our

environment and natural resources. By con-

verting from paper to electronic delivery for

the majority of the user information for your

vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-

mand for tree-based products and lessen the

stress on our environment.

When it comes to service, remember that your

authorized dealer knows your Jeep

vehicle

best, has factory-trained technicians and

genuine MOPAR

parts, and cares about your

satisfaction.

WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information

Each time direction instructions (left/right or

forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are

given, these must be intended as regarding

an occupant in the driver's seat. Special

cases not complying with this rule will be

properly specified in the text.

The figures in the Owner Handbook are pro-

vided by way of example only: this might

imply that some details of the image do not

correspond to the actual arrangement of your

vehicle.

In addition, the Handbook has been con-

ceived considering vehicles with steering

wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible

that on vehicles with steering wheel on the

right side, the position or construction of

some controls is not exactly mirror-like with

respect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the information

needed you can consult the index at the end

of this Owner Handbook.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-

cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd

page. A few pages further there is a key for

getting to know the chapter order and the

relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway

a textual indication of the current chapter at

the side of each even page.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored la-

bels whose symbols indicate precautions to

be observed when using this component.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This

vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a

higher center of gravity than many passenger

vehicles. It is capable of performing better in

a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven

in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out

of control. Because of the higher center of

gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may

roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-

vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can

cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-

ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-

sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or

fatal injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat

belts provided is a major cause of severe or

fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government

notes that the universal use of existing seat

belts could cut the highway death toll by

10,000 or more each year and could reduce

disabling injuries by two million annually. In

a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

Rollover Warning Label

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

While reading this Owner Handbook you will

find a series of WARNINGS to prevent proce-

dures that could damage your vehicle.

There are also CAUTIONS that must be care-

fully followed to prevent incorrect use of the

components of the vehicle, which could

cause accidents or injuries.

VEHICLE CHANGES/

ALTERATIONS

IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the

vehicle might seriously affect its safety and

road holding, thus causing accidents, in

which the occupants could even be fatally

injured.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL...........8

INTERIOR...................9

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel

1 — Door Handle 5 — Climate Controls 9 — Gear Selector 13 — Multifunction Lever

2 — Air Outlets 6 — Glove Compartment 10 — Ignition Switch

3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Window Switch 11 — Horn/Driver Air Bag

4 — Radio 8 — Seats 12 — Instrument Cluster Display

Controls

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTERIOR

Interior Features

1 — Air Outlet

2 — Instrument Cluster

3 — Glove Compartment

4 — Ignition Switch

5 — Horn/Driver Air Bag

6 — Multifunction Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS .....................13

A Word About Your Keys ..........13

Locking Doors With A Key .........13

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate .....13

IGNITIONSWITCH............13

Ignition Key Removal ............13

Key Fob-In-Ignition Reminder .......14

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED .................15

To Enter Remote Start ............15

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF

EQUIPPED..................15

To Arm The System ..............15

To Disarm The System ............16

Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override .16

DOOR LOCKS ...............16

Manual Door Locks ..............16

Power Door Locks ..............17

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear

Doors ......................17

SEATS ....................18

Manual Seats .................18

Power Seats ..................20

Heated Seats..................20

Folding Rear Seat ..............21

Reclining Rear Seat .............22

HEADRESTRAINTS...........22

Supplemental Active Head Restraints —

Front Seats ..................22

Rear Head Restraints.............24

STEERING WHEEL ...........24

Tilt Steering Column .............24

MIRRORS ..................25

Interior Mirrors ................25

Exterior Mirrors ................26

EXTERIORLIGHTS ...........26

Headlights And Parking Lights .......26

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

. .26

High/Low Beam Switch ...........27

Flash-To-Pass .................27

Automatic Headlights ............27

Fog Lights ...................27

Turn Signals ..................27

Lights-On Reminder .............28

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) ........28

INTERIORLIGHTS............28

Instrument Panel Dimming .........28

Map/Reading Lights .............28

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND

WASHERS .................29

Windshield Wiper Operation.........29

Intermittent Wiper System .........29

Windshield Washers .............30

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) ........30

Mist Feature ..................30

Rear Window Wiper/Washer ........31

CLIMATECONTROLS..........31

Manual Climate Controls...........31

Automatic Climate Controls .........34

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped ....................38

Operating Tips .................40

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

POWER WINDOWS — IF

EQUIPPED .................42

Power Window Switches ...........42

Auto-Down ...................42

Window Lockout Switch ...........43

POWER SUNROOF ...........43

Opening.....................44

Closing .....................44

Wind Buffeting ................44

Sunshade Operation .............44

Pinch Protect Feature ............45

Sunroof Maintenance.............45

Ignition Off Operation ............45

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE

HOOD .....................45

LIFTGATE .................46

Cargo Area Features .............47

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR

OPENER (HomeLink) .........48

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink ...................48

Programming A Rolling Code ........49

Programming A Non-Rolling Code .....49

Using HomeLink ...............50

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........50

Power Outlet .................50

Power Inverter ................52

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.

The ignition system consists of a key fob with

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/

STOP push button ignition system. The Re-

mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key

fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.

NOTE:

The passive entry key fob if left inside the car

may not be found by the passive entry control

module if it is located next to a cell phone,

laptop, or other electronic devices, since they

could block the frequency signal.

A Word About Your Keys

The authorized dealer that sold you your new

vehicle has the key code numbers for your

vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to

order duplicate Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

key fobs. Ask your authorized dealer for these

numbers and keep them in a safe place.

Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To

lock the door, turn the key to the right. To

unlock the door, turn the key to the left. Refer

to ”Body Lubrication” in Dealer Service” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for further in-

formation.

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the unlock button on the

key fob once to unlock the driver’s door or

twice within five seconds to unlock all doors

and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash

to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illumi-

nated entry system will also turn on.

IGNITION SWITCH

Ignition Key Removal

1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if

equipped with an automatic

transmission).

2. Place the ignition in the ACC (Accessory)

position.

3. Push the key and cylinder inward and

rotate the key to the LOCK position.

Key Fob

1 — Unlock

2 — Lock

3 — Remote Start

4 — Panic

4. Remove the key from the ignition. NOTE:

If you try to remove the key before you place

the gear selector in PARK, the key may be-

come trapped temporarily in the ignition. If

this occurs, place the gear selector in PARK,

rotate the key clockwise slightly, and then

remove the key as described above. If a

malfunction occurs, the system will trap the

key in the ignition to warn you that this safety

feature is inoperable. The engine can be

started and stopped but the key cannot be

removed until you obtain service.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

automatic transmission into PARK or the

manual transmission into FIRST gear or

REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn

the engine OFF, remove the key fob from

the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

WARNING!

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior

heat build-up may cause serious injury

or death.

CAUTION!

Always remove the key fobs from the ve-

hicle and lock all doors when leaving the

vehicle unattended.

Key Fob-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the key is in

the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK

or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to

remove the key.

Ignition Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

With the driver's door open and the key in the

ignition, the power door locks will not lock,

and key fob will not function.

REMOTE STARTING

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to remote start

the engine conveniently from outside the ve-

hicle, while still maintaining security. The

system has a range of approximately 328 ft

(100 m). Obstructions between the vehicle

and key fob may reduce this range.

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an

automatic transmission to be equipped

with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and the

key fob may reduce this range.

To Enter Remote Start

Push and release the Remote Start button on

the key fob twice within five seconds. The

vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will

flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if pro-

grammed). Then, the engine will start and the

vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode

for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on

during Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sun-

roof operation (if equipped) are disabled

when the vehicle is in the Remote Start

mode.

• If your power door locks were unlocked,

Remote Start will automatically lock the

doors.

• The engine can be started two consecutive

times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key

fob. However, the ignition must be placed

in the ON/RUN position before you can

repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

Remote Start will also cancel if any of the

following occur:

• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.

• Any engine warning lamps come on.

• Low Fuel Light turns on.

• The hood is opened.

• The hazard switch is pushed.

• The transmission is moved out of PARK.

• The brake pedal is pushed.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

— IF EQUIPPED

This vehicle security alarm monitors the

doors, liftgate, and ignition switch for unau-

thorized operation.

When the alarm is activated, the interior

switches for door locks are disabled. The

vehicle security alarm provides both audio

and visual signals, the horn will sound, the

headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals

will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the

disturbance is still present (driver's door, pas-

senger door, other doors, ignition) after three

minutes, the parking lights and tail lights will

flash for an additional 15 minutes.

To Arm The System

1. Remove the key fob from the ignition and

get out of the vehicle.

2. Lock the door using either the power door

lock switch or the key fob lock button and

close all doors.

3. The vehicle security light in the instru-

ment cluster will flash rapidly for approxi-

mately 16 seconds. This shows that the

vehicle security alarm is arming. During

this period, if a door is opened, the igni-

tion is placed in the ON/RUN position, or

the power door locks are unlocked in any

manner, the vehicle security alarm will

automatically disarm. After approximately

16 seconds, the vehicle security light will

flash slowly. This shows that the vehicle

security alarm is fully armed.

To Disarm The System

Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key

into the ignition and place the ignition in the

ON/RUN position.

If something has triggered the vehicle secu-

rity alarm in your absence, the horn will

sound three times, and exterior lights blink

three times when you unlock the doors.

Check the vehicle for tampering. The vehicle

security alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle. However, you can create conditions

where the vehicle security alarm will arm

unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle

and lock the doors with the key fob, once the

vehicle security alarm is armed (after 16 sec-

onds), when you pull the door handle to exit,

the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the

unlock button on the key fob to disarm the

vehicle security alarm.

Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override

The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you

lock the doors using the manual door lock

plunger.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Use the manual door lock knob to lock the

doors from inside the vehicle. If the lock knob

is down when the door is closed, the door will

lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the

vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the

event of an collision, lock the vehicle

doors as you drive as well as when you

park and leave the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

Manual Door Lock Knob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

CAUTION!

Always remove the key fobs from the ve-

hicle and lock all doors when leaving the

vehicle unattended.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on the

driver's and front passenger's door panel.

Push these switches to lock or unlock the

doors and liftgate.

NOTE:

To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,

the power door lock switch will not operate

when the key is in the ignition and either front

door is open. A chime will sound as a re-

minder to remove the key.

Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped

The Automatic Door Lock feature default con-

dition is enabled. When enabled, the door

locks will lock automatically when the vehi-

cle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).

Child-Protection Door Lock System —

Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small chil-

dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors

are equipped with Child-Protection Door

Lock system.

To Engage Or Disengage The Child-

Protection Door Lock System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the

lock and rotate to the lock or unlock

position.

Driver Power Door Lock Switch

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear

door.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a

collision. Remember that the rear doors

can only be opened from the outside when

the Child-Protection locks are engaged.

NOTE:

For emergency exit with the system engaged,

move the lock knob up (unlocked position),

roll down the window, and open the door with

the outside door handle.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint

System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Manual Seats

Manual Front Seat Adjustment

On models equipped with manual seats, the

adjusting bar is located at the front of the

seats, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,

lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or

rearward. Release the bar once you have

reached the desired position. Then, using

body pressure, move forward and rearward on

the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters

have latched.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Manual Seat Adjusting Bar

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous. Moving a seat while driving

could result in loss of control which

could cause a collision and serious in-

jury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fasten-

ing the seat belts and while the vehicle

is parked. Serious injury or death could

result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment

The driver's seat height can be raised or

lowered by using a lever, located on the

outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the

lever to raise the seat height or push down-

ward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Manual Lumbar

The lumbar adjustment handle is located on

the inboard or outboard side of the seatback.

Rotate the lever downward to increase the

lumbar support or rotate the lever upward to

decrease the lumbar support.

Driver's Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located

on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to

the desired angle and release the lever. To

return the seatback, lift the lever, lean for-

ward and release the lever.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so

that the shoulder belt is no longer resting

against your chest. In a collision you could

slide under the seat belt, which could

result in serious injury or death.

Lumbar Support Lever

Power Seats

Some models may be equipped with a power

driver’s seat. The power seat switch is located

on the outboard side of the seat near the

floor. Use the switch to move the seat up,

down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous. Moving a seat while driving

could result in loss of control which

could cause a collision and serious in-

jury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fasten-

ing the seat belts and while the vehicle

is parked. Serious injury or death could

result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat

or impede its ability to move as it may

cause damage to the seat controls. Seat

travel may become limited if movement is

stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s

path.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and

rearward. Push the seat switch forward or

rearward. The seat will move in the direction

of the switch. Release the switch when the

desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or

down. Pull upward or push downward on the

seat switch. The seat will move in the direc-

tion of the switch. Release the switch when

the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted

in four directions. Pull upward or push down-

ward on the front or rear of the seat switch,

the front or rear of the seat cushion will move

in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when the desired position is reached.

Heated Seats

On some models, the front driver and passen-

ger seats may be equipped with heaters in

both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The

controls for the front heated seats are located

on the center instrument panel area.

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat

settings. Amber indicator lights in each

switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two

indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for

LO and none for OFF.

Power Seat Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Push the switch once to select HI-level heat-

ing. Push the switch a second time to select

LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time

to shut the heating elements OFF.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the

heater will provide a boosted heat level dur-

ing the initial stages of operation. Then, the

heat output will drop to the normal HI-level.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system

will automatically switch to LO-level after

approximately 30 minutes of continuous op-

eration. At that time, the display will change

from HI to LO, indicating the change. When

the LO-level heating is selected, the system

automatically turns the heater and the indi-

cator light OFF after approximately 30 min-

utes of continuous operation.

NOTE:

Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be

felt within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to

the skin because of advanced age,

chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-

jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must

exercise care when using the seat

heater. It may cause burns even at low

temperatures, especially if used for long

periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or

seatback that insulates against heat,

such as a blanket or cushion. This may

cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit-

ting in a seat that has been overheated

WARNING!

could cause serious burns due to the

increased surface temperature of the

seat.

Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, each rear

seatback can be folded forward. Pull the

strap forward to fold the rear seatback flat.

NOTE:

You may experience deformation in the seat

cushion from the seat belt buckles if the

seats are left folded for an extended period of

time. This is normal and by simply opening

the seats to the open position, over time the

seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward

and lift the seatback into its upright position.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely

locked into position. If the seatback is not

securely locked into position the seat will

Heated Seat Switches

WARNING!

not provide the proper stability for child

seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

Reclining Rear Seat

For additional comfort, pull the strap forward

just enough to release the seatback latch.

Then, push the seatback to a reclined posi-

tion, approximately 35 degrees maximum,

and release the strap.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so

that the shoulder belt is no longer resting

against your chest. In a collision, you

could slide under the seat belt and be

seriously or even fatally injured. Use the

recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the

risk of injury by restricting head movement in

the event of a rear impact. Head restraints

should be adjusted so that the top of the head

restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit in a

vehicle’s seat until the head restraints

are placed in their proper positions in

order to minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a crash.

• Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints

improperly adjusted or removed could

cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints —

Front Seats

Active Head Restraints (AHRs) are passive,

deployable components, and vehicles with

this equipment cannot be readily identified

by any markings, only through visual inspec-

tion of the head restraint. The head restraint

will be split in two halves, with the front half

being soft foam and trim, the back half being

decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the

front half of the head restraint extends for-

ward to minimize the gap between the back

of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This

system is designed to help prevent or reduce

the extent of injuries to the driver and front

passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”

for further information.

Rear Seat Release Strap

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the

head restraint. To lower the head restraint,

push the adjustment button located at the

base of the head restraint and push down-

ward on the head restraint.

For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can

be tilted forward and backward. To tilt the

head restraint closer to the back of your head,

pull forward on the bottom of the head re-

straint. Push rearward on the bottom of the

head restraint to move the head restraint

away from your head.

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be re-

moved by qualified technicians, for ser-

vice purposes only. If either of the head

restraints require removal, see your autho-

rized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active

Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Re-

straints” in “Safety” for further

information.

Adjustment Button

Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

Active Head Restraint (Tilted Position)

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit in a

vehicle’s seat until the head restraints

are placed in their proper positions in

order to minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a collision.

• Do not place items over the top of the

Active Head Restraint, such as coats,

seat covers or portable DVD players.

These items may interfere with the op-

eration of the Active Head Restraint in

the event of a collision and could result

in serious injury or death.

• Active Head Restraints may be deployed

if they are struck by an object such as a

hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-

dental deployment of the Active Head

Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-

cured, as loose cargo could contact the

Active Head Restraint during sudden

stops. Failure to follow this warning

could cause personal injury if the Active

Head Restraint is deployed.

Rear Head Restraints

The head restraints in the rear are non adjust-

able. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in

“Safety” for information on Tether routing.

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering

column upward or downward. The tilt steer-

ing column lever is located on the left side of

the steering column, below the turn signal

lever.

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering

column. With one hand firmly on the steering

wheel, move the steering column up or down,

as desired. Push the lever up to lock the

steering column firmly in place.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while

driving. Adjusting the steering column

while driving or driving with the steering

Rear Head Restraint

Steering Column Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

column unlocked, could cause the driver

to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious

injury or death.

MIRRORS

Interior Mirrors

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal

and vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the

mirror to center on the view through the rear

window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving

the small control under the mirror to the night

position (toward the rear of vehicle). The

mirror should be adjusted while set in the day

position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for head-

light glare from vehicles behind you. You can

turn the feature on or off by pushing the

button at the base of the mirror. The on/off

symbol on the button will illuminate when the

auto-dimming feature is enabled.

NOTE:

This feature is disabled when the vehicle is

moving in REVERSE.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during

cleaning, never spray any cleaning solu-

tion directly onto the mirror. Apply the

solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

The power mirror control is located on the

driver’s door trim panel.

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand

toward the left or right mirror positions indi-

cated. Tilt the control wand in the direction

you want the mirror to move.

When you are finished adjusting the mirror,

turn the control to the center position to

prevent accidentally moving a mirror.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.

This feature is activated whenever you turn

on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Cli-

mate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlights And Parking Lights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the

first detent to turn on the parking lights. Turn

the end of the lever to the second detent to

turn on the headlights.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The high beam lights will come on as Daytime

Running Lights (lower intensity) whenever

the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the

Power Mirror Controls

1 — Power Mirror Control

2 — Mirror Positions

Turn Signal/Lights Lever

1 — Fog Light Switch

2 — Headlight Switch

3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

headlight switch is off, the parking brake is

off, the turn signal is off and the gear selector

is in any position except PARK.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you

to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull

the multifunction lever toward you to switch

the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your

headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc-

tion lever toward you. This will turn on the

high beam headlights until the lever is re-

leased.

NOTE:

If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-

to-pass position for more than 20 seconds,

the high beams will shut off. If this occurs,

wait 30 seconds for the next flash-to-pass

operation.

Automatic Headlights

Turning the end of the multifunction lever to

the third detent (AUTO), will activate the

automatic headlight system.

With the engine running and the multifunc-

tion lever in the AUTO position, the head-

lights will turn on and turn off based on the

surrounding light levels.

Fog Lights

The front fog light switch is on the multifunc-

tion lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn

on the parking lights or the low beam head-

lights and pull out the end of the multifunc-

tion lever.

NOTE:

The fog lights will only operate with the head-

lights on low beam. Selecting high beam

headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and

the arrows on each side of the instrument

cluster flash to show proper operation of the

front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash,

or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a

defective outside light bulb. If an indicator

fails to light when the lever is moved, it would

suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without mov-

ing beyond the detent, and the turn signal

(right or left) will flash three times. Then, the

turn signal (right or left) will automatically

turn off.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are left on

after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will

sound to alert the driver when the driver's

door is opened.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available

With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights

will turn on approximately 10 seconds after

the wipers are turned on if the headlight

switch is placed in the AUTO position. In

addition, the headlights will turn off when the

wipers are turned off if they were turned on by

this feature.

NOTE:

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can

be turned on or off using the instrument

cluster display. Please refer to the instruction

manuals at www.jeep.com/en/

owners/manuals/ for complete details and

other important safety information.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instrument Panel Dimming

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the

extreme bottom position to fully dim the

instrument panel lights and prevent the inte-

rior lights from illuminating when a door is

opened.

Rotate the center portion of the lever up to

increase the brightness of the instrument

panel lights when the parking lights or head-

lights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward

to the next detent position to brighten the

odometer and radio when the parking lights

or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward

to the last detent to turn on the interior

lighting.

Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun

visors above the rear view mirror. Each light is

turned on by pushing the button. Push the

button a second time to turn the light off. The

lights also come on when a door is opened or

the dimmer control is turned fully upward,

past the second detent.

NOTE:

The lights will remain on until the switch is

pushed a second time, so be sure they have

been turned off before leaving the vehicle.

They will not turn off automatically.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

CAUTION!

• Turn the windshield wipers off when

driving through an automatic car wash.

Damage to the windshield wipers may

result if the wiper control is left in any

position other than off.

• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper

switch and allow the wipers to return to

the park position before turning off the

engine. If the wiper switch is left on and

the wipers freeze to the windshield,

CAUTION!

damage to the wiper motor may occur

when the vehicle is restarted.

• Always remove any buildup of snow that

prevents the windshield wiper blades

from returning to the off position. If the

windshield wiper control is turned off

and the blades cannot return to the off

position, damage to the wiper motor may

occur.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the

second detent past the intermittent settings

for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end

of the lever upward to the third detent past

the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper

operation.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather con-

ditions make a single wiping cycle, with a

variable pause between cycles, desirable. Se-

Wiper/Washer Lever

lect the delay interval by turning the end of

the lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward

(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and

downward (counterclockwise) to increase the

delay time. The delay can be regulated from a

maximum of approximately 18 seconds be-

tween cycles, to a cycle every second.

NOTE:

The wiper delay times depend on vehicle

speed. If the vehicle is moving less than

10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be

doubled.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the control lever

toward you and hold while spray is desired. If

the lever is pulled while in the delay range,

the wiper will operate in low-speed while the

lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after

the lever is released, and then resume the

intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position,

the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles,

then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-

shield could lead to a collision. You might

not see other vehicles or other obstacles.

To avoid sudden icing of the windshield

during freezing weather, warm the wind-

shield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available

With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights

will turn on approximately 10 seconds after

the wipers are turned on if the headlight

switch is placed in the AUTO position. In

addition, the headlights will turn off when the

wipers are turned off if they were turned on by

this feature.

NOTE:

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can

be turned on or off using the instrument

cluster display. Please refer to the instruction

manuals at www.jeep.com/en/owners/

manuals/ for complete details and other im-

portant safety information.

Mist Feature

Push down on the control lever to activate a

single wipe to clear the windshield of road

mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long

as the lever is held down, the wipers will

continue to operate.

NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be

sprayed on the windshield. The wash func-

tion must be used in order to spray the

windshield with washer fluid.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary

switch located on the center portion of the

control lever. The control lever is located on

the right side of the steering column.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward

to the first detent position for rear wiper

operation.

NOTE:

The rear wiper operates in an intermittent

mode only.

Rotate the center portion of the lever past the

first detent to activate the rear washer. The

washer pump and the wiper will continue to

operate as long as the switch is held (for a

maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the

wiper will continue to cycle two times before

returning to the set position.

If the rear wiper is operating when the igni-

tion is turned OFF, the wiper will automati-

cally return to the “park” position if power

accessory delay is active. Power accessory

delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if

this happens the rear wiper will stop at its

current position and will not go to “park”.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to

regulate the temperature, airflow, and direc-

tion of air circulating throughout the vehicle.

The controls are located on the instrument

panel below the radio.

Manual Climate Controls

The controls for the manual heating and air

conditioning system in this vehicle consist of

a series of outer rotary dials and inner push

knobs. These comfort controls can be set to

obtain desired interior conditions.

Manual Climate Controls

Manual Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description

Blower Control

There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode

you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.

NOTE:

Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.

A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Performing this function again

will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counter-

clockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise,

into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.

Modes Control

Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instru-

ment panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow

of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate

airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from

these outlets.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and

side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from

the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister out-

lets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-

ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on

the windshield.

Recirculation Button

Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can

be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

NOTE:

•

Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended

use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of

moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

Icon Description

Front Defrost Mode

Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the

defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best

windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if

equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause

damage to the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the

window. Use a soft cloth and a mild

washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled

off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-

ments, or abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from

the window.

Automatic Climate Controls

Automatic Temperature Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description

Blower Control

There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode

you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position.

NOTE:

Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.

AUTO Setting

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this

function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation”

for more information.

A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Performing this function again

will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counter-

clockwise, from top center into the lower numbers on the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-

wise, into the higher numbers on the scale, indicates warmer temperatures.

Modes Control

Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instru-

ment panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Icon Description

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow

of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate

airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from

these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and

side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from

the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister out-

lets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-

ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture

on the windshield.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description

Recirculation Button

Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can

be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

NOTE:

•

Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended

use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of

moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

Front Defrost Mode

Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the

defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for

best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors

(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automati-

cally turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause

damage to the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive window

CAUTION!

cleaners on the interior surface of the

window. Use a soft cloth and a mild

washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled

off after soaking with warm water.

CAUTION!

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-

ments, or abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from

the window.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the

operator to manually activate or deactivate

the air conditioning system. When the air

conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-

midified air will flow through the outlets into

the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press

the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning

and manually adjust the blower and airflow

mode settings. Also, make sure to select only

Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or

side glass, select Defrost mode and in-

crease blower speed if needed.

• If your air conditioning performance

seems lower than expected, check the

front of the A/C condenser (located in front

of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt

or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray

from the front of the radiator and through

the condenser.

Recirculation

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the Recirculation control button.

The recirculation indicator will illuminate

when this button is selected. Press the but-

ton a second time to turn off the Recircula-

tion mode and allow outside air into the

vehicle.

NOTE:

In cold weather, use of recirculation mode

may lead to excessive window fogging. The

recirculation feature may be unavailable

(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if

conditions exist that could create fogging on

the inside of the windshield. On systems with

Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation

mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to im-

prove window clearing operation. Recircula-

tion will be disabled automatically if this

mode is selected. Attempting to use Recircu-

lation while in this mode will cause the LED

in the control button to blink and then turn

off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —

If Equipped

Automatic Operation

The Automatic Temperature Control system

automatically maintains the climate in the

cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels

desired by the driver and passenger.

Operation of the system is quite simple.

Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and

the Blower Control knob (on the left) to

AUTO.

NOTE:

The AUTO position performs best for front

seat occupants only.

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of

manual override features, which consist of

Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred

Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred

Automatic. This means the operator can over-

ride the blower, the mode, or both. There is a

manual blower range for times when the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can

be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating

the Blower Control knob (on the left).

NOTE:

Please read the Automatic Temperature Con-

trol Operation Chart that follows for details.

The operator can override the AUTO mode

setting to change airflow distribution by ro-

tating the Mode Control knob (on the right).

Operating Tips

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section

for suggested control settings for various

weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected

with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-

vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-

tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” in your Owner’s Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for proper

coolant selection.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster

performance, make sure the engine cooling

system is functioning properly and the proper

amount, type, and concentration of coolant is

used. Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing

And Maintenance” in your Owner’s Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for proper

coolant selection. Use of the air Recircula-

tion mode during Winter months is not rec-

ommended because it may cause window

fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out

of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or

more, run the air conditioning system at idle

for about five minutes in fresh air with the

blower setting in high. This will ensure ad-

equate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the

system is started again.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of

the glass in mild, rainy and/or humid weather.

Windows may frost on the inside of the glass

in very cold weather. To clear the windows,

select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the

front blower speed. Do not use the Recircu-

lation mode without A/C for long periods, as

fogging may occur.

NOTE:

Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will

automatically adjust the climate control set-

tings to reduce or eliminate window fogging

on the front windshield. When this occurs,

recirculation will be unavailable.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in

front of the windshield, is free of obstructions

such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air

intake may reduce airflow, can cause odor,

and if they enter the plenum they could plug

the water drains. In Winter months make sure

the air intake is clear of ice, slush and snow.

A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters outside air

containing dust, pollen and some odors.

Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out.

Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” in your Owner’s Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for filter

replacement instructions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart

POWER WINDOWS — IF

EQUIPPED

Power Window Switches

The window controls on the driver’s door trim

panel control all the door windows. There are

single window controls on each passenger

door trim panel, which operate the passenger

door windows. The window controls will oper-

ate when the ignition placed in the ON/RUN

or ACC position.

NOTE:

• For vehicles not equipped with the instru-

ment cluster display, the power window

switches will remain active for 45 seconds

after the ignition is placed in the LOCK

position. Opening either front door will

cancel this feature.

• For vehicles equipped with the instrument

cluster display, the power window

switches will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is placed in

the LOCK position. Opening either front

door will cancel this feature. The time for

this feature is programmable. Refer to

“Instrument Cluster Display/Personal Set-

tings (Customer-Programmable Fea-

tures)” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a ve-

hicle, and do not let children play with

power windows. Do not leave the key fob in

or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-

sible to children. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become en-

trapped by the windows while operating

the power window switches. Such entrap-

ment may result in serious injury or death.

Auto-Down

The driver's door window switch has an Auto-

Down feature. Push the window switch past

the first detent, release, and the window will

go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-

Down movement, operate the switch in either

the up or down direction and release the

switch.

Power Window Switch Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver's

door allows you to disable the window con-

trols on the rear passenger doors. To disable

the window controls on the rear passenger

doors, push the window lockout switch. To

enable the rear window controls, push the

window lockout switch a second time.

POWER SUNROOF

The power sunroof switch is located on the

overhead console.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Never leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. Occupants, particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped

by the power sunroof while operating the

power sunroof switch. Such entrapment

may result in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of

being thrown from a vehicle with an

open sunroof. You could also be seri-

ously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate

the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,

other body parts, or any object to project

through the sunroof opening. Injury may

result.

Window Lockout Switch

Power Sunroof Switch

1 — Opening Sunroof

2 — Venting Sunroof

3 — Closing Sunroof

Opening

Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the switch rearward and release it

within one-half second. The sunroof and sun-

shade will open automatically and stop when

the full open position is reached. This is

called “Express Open.” During Express Open

operation, any other actuation of the sunroof

switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the

switch rearward. The sunroof will move rear-

ward and automatically stop at full open

position. Any release of the switch will stop

the movement. The sunroof and sunshade

will remain in a partially opened condition

until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one

half second and the sunroof will open to the

vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,

and it will occur regardless of sunroof posi-

tion. During Express Vent operation, any

other actuation of the switch will stop the

sunroof.

Closing

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within

one-half second and the sunroof will close

automatically from any position. The sunroof

will close fully and stop automatically. This is

called “Express Close.” During Express Close

operation, any other actuation of the switch

will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the

switch forward. The sunroof will move for-

ward and automatically stop at full closed

position. Any release of the switch will stop

the movement and the sunroof will remain in

a partially closed condition until the sunroof

switch is pushed again.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a

helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-

hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in

certain open or partially open positions. This

is a normal occurrence and can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

windows open, open the front and rear win-

dows together to minimize the buffeting. If

the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,

adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the

buffeting or open any window.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. How-

ever, the sunshade will open automatically as

the sunroof opens.

NOTE:

The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof

is open.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the

opening of the sunroof during Express Close

operation. If an obstruction in the path of the

sunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto-

matically retract. Remove the obstruction if

this occurs. Next, push the switch forward

and release to Express Close.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft

cloth to clean the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Instrument

Cluster Display

The power sunroof switch will remain active

for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the LOCK position. Opening either

front door will cancel this feature.

For Vehicles Equipped With The Instrument

Cluster Display

The power sunroof switch will remain active

for up to approximately ten minutes after the

ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-

tion. Opening either front door will cancel

this feature.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE

HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be re-

leased.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the

left kick panel.

2. Move the safety latch, located outside the

vehicle under the front edge of the hood,

toward the center and raise the hood.

Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right

side (left side facing hood) of the engine

compartment to secure the hood in the open

position. Place the hood prop at the location

stamped into the inner hood surface.

Hood Release Lever

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before

driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully

latched, it could open when the vehicle is

in motion and block your vision. Failure to

follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage:

• Before closing hood, make sure the hood

prop rod is fully seated into its storage

retaining clips.

• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a

firm downward push at the center front

edge of the hood to ensure that both

latches engage. Never drive your vehicle

unless the hood is fully closed, with both

latches engaged.

LIFTGATE

NOTE:

The key that is used to start the vehicle is also

used to lock or unlock the doors and open the

liftgate.

To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the

lock and turn it to the right (manual lock

models only). The liftgate can also be un-

locked using the key fob or by activating the

power door lock switches located on the front

doors. The central locking/unlocking feature

(if equipped) can also be activated from the

liftgate key cylinder.

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or

closed without using the key fob. To open the

liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release and pull

the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction, or the

key fob is inoperative, insert the key fob

into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn to

the right (manual lock models only). Using

the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate open

with one fluid motion.

Liftgate Handle Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• Although the liftgate has no inside release

mechanism, the liftgate trim panel in-

cludes an opening with a snap-in cap that

provides access to release the latch in the

event of an electrical system malfunction.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow

poisonous exhaust gases into your ve-

hicle. You and your passengers could be

injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate

closed when you are operating the ve-

hicle.

• If you are required to drive with the

liftgate open, make sure that all win-

dows are closed, and the climate control

blower switch is set at high speed. Do

not use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open

position. However, because the gas pressure

drops with temperature, it may be necessary

to assist the props when opening the liftgate

in cold weather.

Cargo Area Features

Cargo Light

The light is mounted in the headliner above

the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area.

Cargo Cover

The cargo area trim panels include two

notches for mounting the available tonneau

cover that accommodates the reclining rear

seat.

To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of

the cover into one of the two notches located

in the rear trim panels. With one of the cover

ends installed, push inward on the opposite

end and install it into the same notch location

of the rear trim panel.

Using the handle, pull the cover toward you

and guide the rear cover posts into the guides

located on both sides of the rear trim panel.

WARNING!

In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the

vehicle could cause injury. It could fly

around in a sudden stop and strike some-

WARNING!

one in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo

cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger

compartment. Remove the cover from the

vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do

not store in the vehicle.

Removable Load Floor

The cargo area load floor is removable and

can be washed with mild soap and water.

Cargo Tie-Down Loops

There are four tie-downs (D-rings) installed in

the cargo area for securing cargo.

WARNING!

• Cargo tie-down loops are not safe an-

chors for a child seat tether strap. In a

sudden stop or collision a loop could pull

loose and allow the child seat to come

loose. A child could be badly injured.

Use only the anchors provided for child

seat tethers.

• The weight and position of cargo and

passengers can change the vehicle cen-

WARNING!

ter of gravity and vehicle handling. To

avoid loss of control resulting in personal

injury, follow these guidelines for load-

ing your vehicle:

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo

floor. Put heavier objects as low and as

far forward as possible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front

of the rear axle. Too much weight or

improperly placed weight over or behind

the rear axle can cause the rear of the

vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than

the top of the seatback. This could im-

pair visibility or become a dangerous

projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

• To help protect against personal injury,

passengers should not be seated in the

rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is

intended for load carrying purposes only,

not for passengers, who should sit in

seats and use seat belts.

Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped

When the liftgate is open, the speakers can

swing down off the trim panel to face rear-

ward, for tailgating and other activities.

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR

OPENER (HomeLink)

• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held

transmitters that operate devices such as

garage door openers, motorized gates,

lighting or home security systems. The

HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles

12 Volt battery.

• The HomeLink buttons that are located in

the overhead console or sunvisor desig-

nate the three different HomeLink chan-

nels.

• The HomeLink indicator is located above

the center button.

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of

the garage before you begin programming.

For efficient programming and accurate

transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it

is recommended that a new battery be placed

in the hand-held transmitter of the device

that is being programmed to the HomeLink

system.

HomeLink Buttons

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To erase the channels, place the ignition

switch into the ON/RUN position, then push

and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons

(I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the red

indicator flashes.

NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only be per-

formed when programming HomeLink for the

first time. Do not erase channels when pro-

gramming additional buttons.

If you have any problems, or require assis-

tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515

or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in-

formation or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

NOTE:

For programming Garage Door Openers that

were manufactured after 1995, these Garage

Door Openers can be identified by the

“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where

the hanging antenna is attached to the Ga-

rage Door Opener. It is NOT the button that is

normally used to open and close the door. The

name and color of the button may vary by

manufacturer.

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN

position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to

3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the

HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator

light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you

want to program while you push and hold

the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob-

serve the indicator light. The HomeLink

indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly

after HomeLink has received the fre-

quency signal from the hand-held trans-

mitter. Release both buttons after the in-

dicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the

garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-

ING” button. This can usually be found

where the hanging antenna wire is at-

tached to the garage door opener motor.

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or

“TRAINING” button.

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate

the next step after the “LEARN” button

has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-

grammed HomeLink button twice (hold-

ing the button for two seconds each time).

If the device is plugged in and activated,

programming is complete.

NOTE:

If the device does not activate, push the

button a third time (for two seconds) to

complete the training.

7. To program the remaining two HomeLink

buttons, repeat each step for each re-

maining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

NOTE:

For programming Garage Door Openers

manufactured before 1995.

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to

3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the

HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator

light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you

want to program while you push and hold

the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob-

serve the indicator light. The HomeLink

indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly

after HomeLink has received the fre-

quency signal from the hand-held trans-

mitter. Release both buttons after the

indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. Push and hold the programmed

HomeLink button and observe the indica-

tor light. If the indicator light stays on

constantly, programming is complete and

the garage door (or device) should activate

when the HomeLink button is pushed.

6. To program the two remaining HomeLink

buttons, repeat each step for each re-

maining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Activation will

now occur for the programmed device (e.g.,

garage door opener, gate operator, security

system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,

etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device

may also be used at any time.

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open

and close while you are programming

the universal transceiver. Do not pro-

gram the transceiver if people or pets are

in the path of the door or gate.

• Do not run your vehicle in a closed

garage or confined area while program-

ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from

your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide

(CO) which is odorless and colorless.

Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in-

haled and can cause you and others to

be severely injured or killed.

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Power Outlet

The power outlet is located on the instrument

panel below the climate control and is pow-

ered when the ignition switch is in the ON/

RUN position.

The outlet can operate a conventional cigar

lighter unit or power accessories designed for

use with a standard power outlet adapter.

Power Outlet

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• Do not exceed the maximum power of

160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the

160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-

ceeded, the fuse protecting the system

will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory

plugs only. Do not insert any other object

in the power outlet as this will damage the

outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of

the power outlet can cause damage not

covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Power Outlet Fuses

1 — Cigar Lighter

2 — Power Outlet

Power Inverter

A 115 Volt, 150 Watt AC power inverter is

located on the front of the center console.

This outlet can power cellular phones, elec-

tronics and other low power devices requiring

power up to 150 Watts.

NOTE:

The power inverter is designed with built-in

overload protection. If the power rating of

150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter

will automatically shut down. Once the elec-

trical device has been removed from the

outlet, the inverter should automatically re-

set. If the power rating exceeds approxi-

mately 170 Watts, the power inverter may

have to be reset manually. To reset the in-

verter manually, unplug the device and plug

it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit,

check the power ratings on electrical devices

prior to using the inverter.

WARNING!

To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:

• use a three-prong adaptor

• insert any objects into the receptacles

• touch with wet hands

Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet

is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

Power Inverter

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........54

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES.................55

Red Telltale Lights ..............55

Yellow Telltale Lights .............57

Green Telltale Lights .............60

Blue Telltale Lights ..............61

White Telltale Lights .............61

MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF

EQUIPPED .................61

Control Buttons ................61

STEP Button ..................61

RESET Button .................62

Trip Odometer (ODO) .............62

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY —

IFEQUIPPED................62

Interactive Display And Controls ......62

Oil Change Indicator System ........64

Instrument Cluster Display Functions . . .64

Compass/Temperature/Audio ........65

Average Fuel Economy ............65

Distance To Empty (DTE) ..........65

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) ........65

Elapsed Time .................65

Display Units Of Measure In ........65

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features) ....................65

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —

OBDII ....................66

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity .................66

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .......67

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ....67

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Instrument Cluster

1 — Speedometer 4 — Instrument Cluster Display

2 — Tachometer 5 — Fuel Gauge

3 — Temperature Gauge

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator light switches on in the

instrument panel together with a dedicated

message and/or acoustic signal when appli-

cable. These indications are indicative and

precautionary and as such must not be con-

sidered as exhaustive and/or alternative to

the information contained in the Owner

Manual, which you are advised to read care-

fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-

tion in this chapter in the event of a failure

indication.

All active telltales will display first, if appli-

cable. The system check menu may appear

different based upon equipment options and

current vehicle status. Some telltales are

optional and may not appear.

The following warning lamps and indicators

will alert you to a vehicle condition that may

become serious. Some lamps will illuminate

when you start your vehicle to make sure they

work. If any lamps remain on after starting

your vehicle, refer to the respective system

warning lamp for further information.

Red Telltale Lights

— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to

ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to

eight seconds as a bulb check. During the

bulb check, if the driver's or passenger seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After

the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s

seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will flash or remain on con-

tinuously and a chime will sound.

— Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either

not on during startup, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected at

an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when

a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has

been detected, it will stay on until the fault is

cleared. If the light comes on intermittently

or remains on while driving, have an autho-

rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

— Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied,

that the brake fluid level is low, or that there

is a problem with the anti-lock brake system

reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking

brake has been disengaged, and the fluid

level is at the full mark on the master cylinder

reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-

draulic system malfunction or that a problem

with the Brake Booster has been detected by

the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this

case, the light will remain on until the condi-

tion has been corrected. If the problem is

related to the brake booster, the ABS pump

will run when applying the brake, and a brake

pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve

braking capacity in the event of a failure to a

portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in

either half of the dual brake system is indi-

cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will

turn on when the brake fluid level in the

master cylinder has dropped below a speci-

fied level.

The light will remain on until the cause is

corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid

level conditions. The vehicle should have

service performed, and the brake fluid level

checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair

is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light

on is dangerous. Part of the brake system

may have failed. It will take longer to stop

the vehicle. You could have a collision.

Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-

tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the

event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning

Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.

Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-

quired.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be

checked by turning the ignition switch from

the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.

The light should illuminate for approximately

two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake

fault is detected. If the light does not illumi-

nate, have the light inspected by an autho-

rized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking

brake is applied with the ignition switch in

the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake

application.

— Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-

mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly

until the vehicle is disarmed.

— Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If

the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as

possible. A chime will sound when this light

turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is

corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level

must be checked under the hood.

— Battery Charge Warning Light

This light illuminates when the battery is not

charging properly. If it stays on while the

engine is running, there may be a malfunc-

tion with the charging system. Contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

indicates a possible problem with the electri-

cal system or a related component.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-

Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the vehicle is run-

ning, the light will either stay on or flash

depending on the nature of the problem.

Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is

safely and completely stopped and the trans-

mission is placed in the PARK position. The

light should turn off. If the light remains on

with the vehicle under power, your vehicle

will usually be drivable; however, see an au-

thorized dealer for service as soon as pos-

sible.

If the light continues to flash when the ve-

hicle is under power, immediate service is

required and you may experience reduced

performance, and your vehicle may require

towing. The light will come on when the

ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position

and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the

light does not come on during starting, have

the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Yellow Telltale Lights

— Malfunction Warning Light

The vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors emis-

sions control systems. The light will illumi-

nate when the ignition is in the ON position

before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not

come on when placing the ignition in the

ON/RUN position, have the condition

checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing

gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi-

nate the light after vehicle start. The vehicle

should be serviced if the light stays on

through several typical driving styles. In most

situations, the vehicle will drive normally and

will not require towing.

When the vehicle is running, the MIL may

flash to alert serious conditions that could

lead to immediate loss of power or severe

catalytic converter damage. The vehicle

should be serviced as soon as possible if this

occurs.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as

referenced above, can reach higher tem-

peratures than in normal operating condi-

tions. This can cause a fire if you drive

slowly or park over flammable substances

such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.

This could result in death or serious injury

to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-

age to the vehicle control system. It also

could affect fuel economy and driveability.

If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon

occur. Immediate service is required.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Warning Light

The warning light switches on and a message

is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or

that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-

sumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition

mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in

sequence.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compro-

mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp

braking and steering. Repair immediately

using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact your authorized dealership as soon

as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-

ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-

minates, you should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling

and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the

driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This se-

quence will continue upon subsequent ve-

hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-

hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-

tion telltale after replacing one or more tires

or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels.

TPMS pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when

using replacement equipment that is not

of the same size, type, and/or style. After-

market wheels can cause sensor damage.

Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause

the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-

ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer to have your sensor

function checked.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) is off.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Indicator Light

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument

cluster will come on when the ignition is

placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go

out when the engine is running. If the “ESC

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with

the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light

remains on after several ignition cycles, and

the vehicle has been driven several miles

(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph

(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon

as possible to have the problem diagnosed

and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the

“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition is placed in

the ON/RUN position.

• Each time the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be

ON, even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or

clicking sounds when it is active. This is

normal; the sounds will stop when ESC

becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

This telltale indicates that an ESC event is

active.

— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator

Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-

tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN po-

sition and may stay on for as long as four

seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while

driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the

brake system is not functioning and service is

required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if

the brake warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system

should be serviced as soon as possible to

restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If

the ABS light does not turn on when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN po-

sition, have the light inspected by an autho-

rized dealer.

— Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately

2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and

remain on until fuel is added.

— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is

in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front

and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked

together forcing the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed. Low range provides

a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-

creased torque at the wheels.

Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information on four-wheel drive op-

eration and proper use.

— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator

Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap

is loose. Properly close the filler cap to dis-

engage the light. If the light does not turn off,

please see your authorized dealer.

— Low Windshield Washer Fluid Indi-

cator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the wind-

shield washer fluid is low.

— Transmission Temperature Indicator

Light

This light indicates that the transmission

fluid temperature is running hot. This may

occur with severe usage, such as trailer tow-

ing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission

into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or

faster until the light turns off.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when

the Transmission Temperature Warning

Light is illuminated you could cause the

fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot

engine or exhaust components and cause

a fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission

Temperature Warning Light illuminated

will eventually cause severe transmission

damage or transmission failure.

Green Telltale Lights

— Turn Signal Warning Lights

The instrument cluster arrow will flash inde-

pendently for the left or right turn signal as

selected, as well as the exterior turn signal

lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the

multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up

(right).

• A continuous chime will sound if the ve-

hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)

with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb

if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

— Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park

lights or headlights are turned on.

— Front Fog Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front

fog lights are on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Blue Telltale Lights

— High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam

headlights are on. Push the multifunction

control lever away from you to switch the

headlights to high beam. Pull the lever to-

ward you to switch the headlights back to low

beam. Pull the lever toward you for a tempo-

rary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

White Telltale Lights

— Cruise Indicator

This indicator shows that the Speed Control

System is ON.

— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator

Light — If Equipped

This indicator shows when the Hill Descent

Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp

will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can

only be armed when the transfer case is in the

“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed

is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these

conditions are not met while attempting to

use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light

will flash on/off.

MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF

EQUIPPED

The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the

instrument cluster and features a driver-

interactive trip information and temperature

display.

NOTE:

The system will display the last known out-

side temperature when starting the vehicle

and may need to be driven several minutes

before the updated temperature is displayed.

Engine temperature can also affect the dis-

played temperature; therefore, temperature

readings are not updated when the vehicle is

not moving.

Control Buttons

STEP Button

Push the STEP button located on the steering

wheel to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Tem-

perature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A,

Trip B).

Mini-Trip Control Buttons

RESET Button

To reset the display shown, turn the ignition

to the ON position, then push and hold the

RESET button located on the steering wheel.

The following displays can be reset or

changed:

• Trip A

• Trip B

Trip Odometer (ODO)

This display shows the distance traveled

since the last reset. Push and release the

STEP button on the instrument cluster to

switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.

Trip A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A

since the last reset.

Trip B

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B

since the last reset.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-

ment cluster display, which offers useful in-

formation to the driver. With the ignition in

the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a

door will activate the display for viewing, and

display the total miles, or kilometers, in the

odometer. Your instrument cluster display is

designed to display important information

about your vehicle’s systems and features.

Using a driver interactive display located on

the instrument panel, your instrument clus-

ter display can show you how systems are

working and give you warnings when they

aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls

allow you to scroll through and enter the main

menus and submenus. You can access the

specific information you want and make se-

lections and adjustments.

Interactive Display And Controls

The instrument cluster display features a

driver-interactive display that is located in

the instrument cluster.

The menu items consists of the following:

• System Status

• Units

• Vehicle Information Warning Message Dis-

plays

Instrument Cluster Display

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)

• Compass Heading

• Outside Temperature Display

• Trip Computer Functions

• Uconnect Phone Displays (if equipped)

• Audio Mode Display

• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

The system allows the driver to select infor-

mation by pushing the following buttons

mounted on the steering wheel:

MENU Button

Push and release the MENU button to scroll

through the main menus (Fuel Economy,

Warnings, Timer, Units, System, Personal

Settings) or to exit submenus.

Compass Button

Push and release the compass button to dis-

play one of eight compass readings and the

outside temperature or to exit submenus.

Right Arrow Button

Push and release the right arrow button for

access to main menus, submenus, or to se-

lect a personal setting in the setup menu.

Down Arrow Button

Push and release the down arrow button to

scroll downward through the submenus.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the

following messages display:

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning

chime after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance

travelled)

• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a

single chime)

• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a

single chime)

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

1 — Uconnect

Voice Command

Button

4 — Uconnect

Phone Button

2—

MENU Button 5 — Right Arrow

Button

3 — Compass Button 6 — Down Arrow

Button

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a

single chime)

• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a

single chime)

• Battery Low (with a single chime)

• Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle is

not in PARK (automatic transmission), or

vehicle is in motion (manual transmission)

• Door Open (with vehicle graphic showing

which door is open. A single chime sounds

if the vehicle is in motion)

• Doors Open (with vehicle graphic showing

which doors are open. A single chime

sounds if the vehicle is in motion)

• Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the

liftgate open and a single chime)

• Headlamps or Park Lamps On

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Open

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

• Key In Ignition

• Low Tire

• Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium

TPM System

• Service TPM System

Oil Change Indicator System

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil

change indicator system. The “Oil Change

Required” message will display in the instru-

ment cluster display for approximately five

seconds after a single chime has sounded to

indicate the next scheduled oil change inter-

val. The engine oil change indicator system is

duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil

change interval may fluctuate dependent

upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to

display each time you place the ignition in

the ON/RUN position. To turn off the mes-

sage temporarily, push and release the Trip

Odometer button on the instrument cluster.

To reset the oil change indicator system (after

performing the scheduled maintenance), re-

fer to the following procedure.

1. Place the ignition in the ON position. Do

not start the engine.

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly,

three times within ten seconds.

3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK

position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when

you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator

system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this

procedure.

Instrument Cluster Display Functions

• Compass/Temperature/Audio

• Average Fuel Economy

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

• Units In

• Elapsed Time

• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

• Personal Settings

To Reset The Display

Pushing and holding the right arrow button

once will clear the function currently being

displayed. Reset will only occur if a reset-

table function is currently being displayed.

To reset all resettable functions, push and

release the right arrow button a second time

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

within three seconds of resetting the cur-

rently displayed function. Reset ALL will be

displayed during this three-second window.

Compass/Temperature/Audio

Push and release the compass button to dis-

play one of eight compass headings to indi-

cate the direction the vehicle is facing, the

outside temperature, and the current radio

station.

Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the

last reset (pushing and holding the right arrow

button as prompted in the instrument cluster

display to reset). When the fuel economy is

reset, the display will read “RESET” or show

dashes for two seconds. Then, the history

information will be erased, and the averaging

will continue from the last fuel reading before

the reset.

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be

traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank.

This estimated distance is determined by a

weighted average of the instantaneous and

average fuel economy, according to the cur-

rent fuel tank level. This is not resettable.

NOTE:

Significant changes in driving style or vehicle

loading will greatly affect the actual drivable

distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE

displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles

(48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE

display will change to a text display of "LOW

FUEL." This display will continue until the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant

amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the

"LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will be

displayed, based on the current values in the

DTE calculation and the current fuel tank

level.

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in “Safety” for system operation.

Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since

the last reset. Elapsed time will increment

when the ignition is placed in the RUN/

START position.

Elapsed time is displayed as follows:

hours: minutes: seconds

Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and

holding the right arrow button (as prompted

in the display). Upon reset, all digits will

change to zeros, and time will start again if

the ignition is in the RUN or START position.

Display Units Of Measure In

To make your selection, push and release the

right arrow button until “US” or “METRIC”

appears.

Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)

This allows the driver to set and recall fea-

tures when the transmission is in PARK (au-

tomatic transmission) or the vehicle is

stopped (manual transmission).

Push and release the MENU or down arrow

button until “Personal Settings” is displayed

in the instrument cluster display then push

and release the right arrow button.

Use the right arrow button to highlight your

MENU/SUBMENU choices:

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated

Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.

This system monitors the performance of the

emissions, engine, and automatic transmis-

sion control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide

excellent performance and fuel economy, as

well as emissions well within current govern-

ment regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the

OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag-

nostic codes and other information to assist

your service technician in making repairs.

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable

and not need towing, see your authorized

dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could

cause further damage to the emission

control system. It could also affect fuel

economy and driveability. The vehicle

must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is

running, severe catalytic converter dam-

age and power loss will soon occur. Im-

mediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard

Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection

port to allow access to information related to

the performance of your emissions controls.

Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the

diagnosis and service of your vehicle and

emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician

should connect equipment to the OBD II

connection port in order to diagnose or

service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected

to the OBD II connection port, such as a

driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems,

could be impaired or a loss of ve-

hicle control could occur that may

result in an accident involving seri-

ous injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access,

information stored in your vehicle

systems, including personal infor-

mation.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-

rity” in “Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual

at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic

system can determine if the fuel filler cap is

possibly loose or improperly installed. A

“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the

instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until

a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indi-

cation that the gas cap is properly tightened.

Push the trip odometer RESET button to turn

off the message. If the problem persists, the

message will appear the next time the vehicle

is started. This might indicate a damaged

cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,

the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the

problem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION

AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal require-

ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's

emissions control system. Failure to pass

could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an

Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check

verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is

functioning and is not on

when the engine is run-

ning, and that the OBD II system is ready for

testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.

The OBD II system may not be ready if your

vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a

dead battery or a battery replacement. If the

OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail

the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated

test, which you can use prior to going to the

test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II

system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will

have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to

the ON position, you will see the “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol

come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of

two things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds

and then return to being fully illuminated

until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will

remain fully illuminated until you place

the ignition in the off position or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is ready and you can pro-

ceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should

see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If

your vehicle was recently serviced or had a

battery failure or replacement, you may need

to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as

you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above

test routine may then indicate that the sys-

tem is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II

system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi-

nated during normal vehicle operation you

should have your vehicle serviced before go-

ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the

engine running.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES...........70

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......70

Electronic Brake Control System .....71

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .77

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) .....................77

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS ..................83

Occupant Restraint Systems Features . .83

Important Safety Precautions .......84

Seat Belt Systems ..............84

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS). .95

Child Restraints ...............104

Transporting Pets ..............115

SAFETY TIPS ...............115

Transporting Passengers ..........115

Exhaust Gas .................115

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle ....................116

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle.............117

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides

increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-

mance under most braking conditions. The

system automatically prevents wheel lock,

and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-

sure that the ABS is working properly each

time the vehicle is started and driven. During

this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking

sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the

system detects one or more wheels begin to

lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,

gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,

or panic stops may increase the likelihood of

ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when

ABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to

run for a short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end

of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-

tronic equipment that may be suscep-

tible to interference caused by improp-

erly installed or high output radio

transmitting equipment. This interfer-

ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock

braking capability. Installation of such

equipment should be performed by

qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will

diminish their effectiveness and may

lead to a collision. Pumping makes the

stopping distance longer. Just press

firmly on your brake pedal when you

need to slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws

of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase braking or steering

efficiency beyond that afforded by the

WARNING!

condition of the vehicle brakes and tires

or the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-

cluding those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, following another vehicle

too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped

vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner that could

jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety

of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM

tires. Modification may result in degraded

ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”

will turn on when the ignition is turned to the

ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as

four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-

mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-

cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake

system is not functioning and that service is

SAFETY

required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if

the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,

the brake system should be serviced as soon

as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock

brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning

Light” does not come on when the ignition is

turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light

repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced

Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This

system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start

Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-

tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems

work together to enhance both vehicle stabil-

ity and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill

Descent Control (HDC).

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the

braking torque between the front and rear

axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear

axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the

rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to

prevent the rear axle from entering ABS be-

fore the front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will

turn on when the ignition is turned to the

ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as

four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains

on or comes on while driving, it indicates that

the brake system is not functioning properly

and that immediate service is required. If the

“Brake System Warning Light” does not

come on when the ignition is turned to the

ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as

soon as possible.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s

braking capability during emergency braking

maneuvers. The system detects an emer-

gency braking situation by sensing the rate

and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This

can help reduce braking distances. The BAS

complements the anti-lock brake system

(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-

sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive

the benefit of the system, you must apply

continuous braking pressure during the stop-

ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).

Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless

braking is no longer desired. Once the brake

pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,

including those resulting from excessive

WARNING!

speed in turns, driving on very slippery

surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities

of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-

ner, which could jeopardize the user's

safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll

back from a complete stop while on an in-

cline. If the driver releases the brake while

stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to

hold the brake pressure for a short period. If

the driver does not apply the throttle before

this time expires, the system will release

brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down

the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in

order for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• Park brake must be off.

• Driver door must be closed.

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle

uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill

is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is

in REVERSE gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all

forward gears. The system will not activate

if the transmission is in PARK or NEU-

TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a

manual transmission, if the clutch is

pressed, HSA will remain active.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill

Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and

slight rolling may occur, such as on minor

hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while

pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the

driver’s responsibility to be attentive to

distance to other vehicles, people, and

objects, and most importantly brake op-

eration to ensure safe operation of the

vehicle under all road conditions. Your

complete attention is always required

while driving to maintain safe control of

WARNING!

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off.

To change the current setting using your

instrument cluster display, refer to “Instru-

ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

For vehicles not equipped with an instrument

cluster display, perform the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels

pointing straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more

than one-half turn to the left.

SAFETY

6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the

lower switch bank below the climate con-

trol four times within 20 seconds. The

“ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on

and turn off two times.

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center

and then an additional slightly more than

one-half turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and

then back to ON. If the sequence was

completed properly, the “ESC Off Indica-

tor Light” will blink several times to con-

firm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return

this feature to its previous setting.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel

spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel

spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake

pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or re-

duce engine power to provide enhanced ac-

celeration and stability. A feature of the TCS,

Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions

similar to a limited slip differential and con-

trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If

one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster

than the other, the system will apply the

brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow

more engine torque to be applied to the wheel

that is not spinning. BLD may remain en-

abled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced

mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and

stability of the vehicle under various driving

conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or

understeering of the vehicle by applying the

brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer

condition. Engine power may also be reduced

to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine

the vehicle path intended by the driver and

compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the

intended path, ESC applies the brake of the

appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting

the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning

more than appropriate for the steering

wheel position.

• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning

less than appropriate for the steering

wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” located in the instrument cluster will

start to flash as soon as the ESC system

becomes active. The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes

when the TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-

gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on

the accelerator and apply as little throttle as

possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

•

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-

dents, including those resulting from ex-

cessive speed in turns, driving on very

slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC

also cannot prevent accidents resulting

WARNING!

from loss of vehicle control due to inap-

propriate driver input for the conditions.

Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver

can prevent accidents. The capabilities of

an ESC equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-

ner which could jeopardize the user’s

safety or the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-

erly maintain your vehicle, may change

the handling characteristics of your ve-

hicle, and may negatively affect the per-

formance of the ESC system. Changes to

the steering system, suspension, brak-

ing system, tire type and size or wheel

size may adversely affect ESC perfor-

mance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC

performance. Any vehicle modification

or poor vehicle maintenance that re-

duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-

tem can increase the risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-

sonal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

The ESC system has three available operating

modes for four–wheel drive equipped ve-

hicles and two available operating modes for

two–wheel drive equipped vehicles.

Full On (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-

Wheel Drive Models)

This is the normal operating mode for ESC.

Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC

system will be in this “On” mode. This mode

should be used for most driving situations.

ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or

“ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted be-

low.

Partial Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On

(Two-Wheel Drive Models)

This mode is entered by momentarily pushing

the “ESC Off” switch. When in “Partial Off”

mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the

“limited slip” feature described in the TCS

section, has been disabled, and the "ESC

OFF Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All

other stability features of ESC function nor-

mally. This mode is intended to be used if the

vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel con-

ditions, and more wheel spin than ESC would

normally allow is required to gain traction.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the

“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the nor-

mal “ESC On” mode of operation.

NOTE:

To improve the vehicle's traction when driving

with snow chains, or starting off in deep

snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to

switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pushing

the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation

requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial

Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by

momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” switch.

This may be done while the vehicle is in

motion.

WARNING!

When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-

tionality of ESC (except for the limited slip

feature described in the TCS section) has

been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator

Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-

tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction

SAFETY

WARNING!

of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced

vehicle stability offered by the ESC system

is reduced. Trailer Sway control (TSC) (if

equipped) is disabled when the ESC sys-

tem is in the "Partial Off" mode.

Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)

This mode is intended for off-highway or

off-road use when ESC stability features

could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to

trail conditions. This mode is entered by

pushing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for

five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and

the engine is running. After five seconds, the

"ESC OFF Indicator Light" will illuminate and

the “ESC OFF” message will appear in the

odometer. Push and release the Trip Odom-

eter button located on the instrument cluster

to clear this message.

In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the

“limited slip” feature described in the TCS

section, are turned off until the vehicle

reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At

35 mph (56 km/h), the system returns to

“Partial Off” mode, as described above. TCS

remains off. When the vehicle speed drops

below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC system

shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle

speeds so that it will not interfere with off-

road driving however, ESC function returns to

provide the stability feature at speeds above

35 mph (56 km/h). The "ESC OFF Indicator

Light" will always be illuminated when ESC is

off.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the

“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the “ESC

On” mode of operation.

NOTE:

The “ESC OFF” message will display and an

audible chime will sound when the gear se-

lector is placed into the PARK position from

any other position, and then moved out of the

PARK position. This will occur even if the

message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque

reduction and stability features are dis-

abled. In an emergency evasive maneuver,

the ESC system will not engage to assist in

WARNING!

maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is

intended for off-highway or off-road use

only.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

and ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument

cluster will come on when

the ignition is turned to

the ON mode. It should go

out with the engine run-

ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-

dicator Light” comes on continuously with

the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light

remains on after several ignition cycles, and

the vehicle has been driven several miles

(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph

(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon

as possible to have the problem diagnosed

and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” (located in the instrument cluster)

starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-

tion and the ESC system becomes active. The

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” begins to flash during acceleration,

ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your

speed and driving to the prevailing road con-

ditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-

tor Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator

Light” come on momentarily each time

the ignition is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the

ESC system will be on even if it was turned

off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or

clicking sounds when it is active. This is

normal; the sounds will stop when ESC

becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator

Light” indicates the cus-

tomer has elected to have

the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) in a re-

duced mode.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for

wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering

wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.

When ERM determines that the rate of

change of the steering wheel angle and vehi-

cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause

wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate

brake and may also reduce engine power to

lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift

occurring during severe or evasive driving

maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due

to other factors, such as road conditions,

leaving the roadway, or striking objects or

other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full

Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a

complete explanation of the available ESC

modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading,

road conditions and driving conditions,

influence the chance that wheel lift or

rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent

all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking

objects or other vehicles. The capabilities

of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never

be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user's

safety or the safety of others.

SAFETY

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

This system maintains vehicle speed while

descending hills during off-road driving situ-

ations. HDC will automatically apply the

brakes to control downhill speed to between

4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depend-

ing on terrain. The system is activated by

placing the vehicle in “Off-Road” mode and

placing the gear selector in LOW or RE-

VERSE. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in

“Starting And Operating” for further informa-

tion.

When HDC is properly en-

abled, the “Hill Decent

Control Light” in the in-

strument cluster will be

illuminated.

HDC has the capability to

sense terrain and will only activate when the

vehicle is descending a hill. It will not acti-

vate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be

fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into

ESC “Full Off” mode. This is done by pushing

and holding the “ESC Off” button for five

seconds. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-

trol (ESC)” in this section of the manual.

HDC operation can be overridden with brake

application to slow the vehicle down below

the HDC control speed. Conversely, if more

speed is desired during HDC control, the

accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed

like normal. When either the brake or the

accelerator is released, HDC will control the

vehicle back to the original set speed.

HDC is only intended for low speed off-road

driving. At vehicle speeds above 31 mph

(50 km/h), HDC will no longer function. If the

“HDC Indicator Light” begins to flash, this

indicates that the brakes are getting too hot

and the vehicle should be stopped to allow

the brakes to cool.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in

controlling vehicle speed when descend-

ing hills. The driver must remain attentive

to the driving conditions and is responsible

for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

AUXILIARY DRIVING

SYSTEMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

will warn the driver of a low tire pressure

based on the vehicle recommended cold

placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature

by about 1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F

(6.5°C). This means that when the outside

temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set

based on “cold inflation tire pressure”. This

is defined as the tire pressure after the ve-

hicle has not been driven for at least three

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

after a three hour period. The cold tire infla-

tion pressure must not exceed the maximum

inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”

in “Servicing And Maintenance” for informa-

tion on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s

tires. The tire pressure will also increase as

the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there

should be no adjustment for this increased

pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire

pressure if the tire pressure falls below the

low-pressure warning limit for any reason,

including low temperature effects, or natural

pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of

low tire pressure as long as the condition

exists, and will not turn off until the tire

pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-

sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-

tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the

tire pressure to the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The

system will automatically update and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn

off once the system receives the updated tire

pressures.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recom-

mended cold (parked for more than three

hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa).

If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)

and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi

(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)

will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-

mately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is

sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving

the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise

to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only

after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s

recommended cold placard pressure value.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels.

TPMS pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when

using replacement equipment that is not

of the same size, type, and/or style.

Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor

damage.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-

able. After using an aftermarket tire

sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealer to

have your sensor function checked.

SAFETY

CAUTION!

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt

from entering the valve stem, which

could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-

mal tire care and maintenance or to pro-

vide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire

pressure gauge while adjusting your tire

pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure using an accurate tire gauge, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect

tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor

the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Base System

This is the TPMS warning

indicator located in the in-

strument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless

technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sen-

sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,

mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the

Receiver Module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check

the tire pressure in all of the tires on your

vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper

pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following compo-

nents:

• Receiver Module.

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-

ings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a

LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a

minimum of five seconds, and an audible

chime will be activated when one or more of

the four active road tire pressures are low.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as

possible, check the inflation pressure of each

tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to

the vehicle’s recommended cold placard

pressure value. The system will automatically

update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Light will extinguish and the LOW TIRE mes-

sage will turn off once the updated tire pres-

sures have been received.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off.The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this informa-

tion.

Check TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will flash on and off for 75 seconds and

remain on solid when a system fault is de-

tected. The system fault will also sound a

chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this

sequence will repeat providing the system

fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light will turn off when the fault

condition no longer exists. A system fault can

occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-

ing next to facilities emitting the same

radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket win-

dow tinting that affects radio wave

signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with

TPM sensors.

NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact

spare wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a

tire pressure monitoring sensor. There-

fore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire

pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in

place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit,

upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime

will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message

will still turn ON due to the low tire.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to

10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then

remain on solid.

SAFETY

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a

chime will sound and the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and

off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original

road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in

place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS

will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is

below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to

10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in

order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

Premium System — If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with

wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,

mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the

receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check

the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following compo-

nents:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three

of the four wheel wells)

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Messages, which display in the instrument

cluster

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-

ings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will illuminate in the instrument cluster and

an audible chime will be activated when one

or more of the four active road tire pressures

are low. The audible chime will sound once

every ignition cycle for the first condition that

it detects. In addition, the instrument cluster

will display a “LOW TIRE” text message for a

minimum of five seconds and a graphic of the

pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of

the four active road tire(s), you should stop as

soon as possible and inflate all tires that are

flashing on the graphic display to the vehi-

cle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value. The system will automatically update,

the “LOW TIRE” text message will no longer

be displayed, the graphic display of the pres-

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

sure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish

once the updated tire pressure(s) have been

received.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off.The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this informa-

tion.

Service TPMS Message

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and

remain on solid when a system fault is de-

tected. The system fault will also sound a

chime. The instrument cluster will display a

“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a

minimum of five seconds. This text message

is then followed by a graphic display, with “-

-“ in place of the pressure value(s) indicating

which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is

not being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still

exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no

longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

text message will not be present, and a pres-

sure value will be displayed instead of

dashes. A system fault can occur with any of

the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-

ing next to facilities emitting the same

radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket win-

dow tinting that affects radio wave

signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with

TPM sensors.

The instrument cluster will also display a

"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a mini-

mum of five seconds when a system fault

related to an incorrect sensor location fault is

detected. In this case, the "SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM" message is then followed with a

graphic display with pressure values still

shown. This indicates that the pressure val-

ues are still being received from the TPM

sensors but they may not be located in the

correct vehicle position. The system still

needs to be serviced as long as the "SERVICE

TPM SYSTEM" message is displayed.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

SAFETY

NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact

spare wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a

tire pressure monitoring sensor. There-

fore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire

pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in

place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit,

upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime

will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light will still turn ON due to

the low tire. The “LOW TIRE” text mes-

sage and the graphic with the low tire

pressure flashing will be displayed.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to

10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then

remain on solid. In addition, the instru-

ment cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five

seconds and then display dashes (- -) in

place of the pressure values.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a

chime will sound and the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and

off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid, and the instrument cluster will dis-

play a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message

for a minimum of five seconds and then

display dashes (- -) in place of the pres-

sure values.

5. Once you repair or replace the original

road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in

place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS

will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is

below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to

10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in

order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in

your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Air Bags

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints

• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this

section may be standard equipment on some

models, or may be optional equipment on

others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-

rized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information

in this section. It tells you how to use your

restraint system properly, to keep you and

your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to

minimize the risk of harm from a deploying

air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should

always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a

rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a

rear-facing child restraint) must ride in

the front passenger seat, move the seat as

far back as possible and use the proper

child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”

in this section for further information).

3. Children that are not big enough to wear

the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to

“Child Restraints” in this section for fur-

ther information) should be secured in a

vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints

or belt-positioning booster seats. Older

children who do not use child restraints or

belt-positioning booster seats should ride

properly buckled up in a vehicle with a

rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder

belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided

with your child restraint to make sure that

you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap

and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats

should be moved back as far as practical

to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If

your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-

ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate

forcefully into the space between occu-

pants and the door and occupants could

be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs

to be modified to accommodate a dis-

abled person, refer to the “Customer As-

sistance” section for customer service

contact information.

WARNING!

• NEVER use a rearward facing child re-

straint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE

AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI-

OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

• A deploying passenger front air bag can

cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in

a rear-facing child restraint.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent

driver, even on short trips. Someone on the

road may be a poor driver and could cause a

collision that includes you. This can happen

far away from home or on your own street.

SAFETY

Research has shown that seat belts save

lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of

injuries in a collision. Some of the worst

injuries happen when people are thrown from

the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility

of ejection and the risk of injury caused by

striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in

a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind

the driver and outboard front seat passenger

(if equipped with outboard front passenger

seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The

Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni-

tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition

switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If

the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition

switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on

and remain on until both outboard front seat

belts are buckled. The outboard front passen-

ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out-

board front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated

when the vehicle is moving above a specified

vehicle speed range and the driver or out-

board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when the outboard

front passenger seat is unoccupied). The

BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking

the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding

an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert

warning sequence has completed, the Seat

Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the

seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed

until the driver and occupied outboard front

seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The

driver should instruct all occupants to buckle

their seat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger

(if equipped with outboard front passenger

seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while

the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning

sequence will begin until the seat belts are

buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert

is not active when the outboard front passen-

ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be

triggered when an animal or other items are

placed on the outboard front passenger seat

or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It

is recommended that pets be restrained in

the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or

pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,

and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by

your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not

recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the

driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re-

minder Light will turn on and remain on until

the driver and outboard front seat passenger

seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are

equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only

during very sudden stops or collisions. This

feature allows the shoulder part of the seat

belt to move freely with you under normal

conditions. However, in a collision the seat

belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking

the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out

of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead

to more severe injuries in a collision. The

air bags work with your seat belt to

WARNING!

restrain you properly. In some collisions,

the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always

wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers

can suffer much greater injuries if you

are not properly buckled up. You can

strike the interior of your vehicle or other

passengers, or you can be thrown out of

the vehicle. Always be sure you and

others in your vehicle are buckled up

properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc-

cupants, including the driver, should al-

ways wear their seat belts whether or not

an air bag is also provided at their seat-

WARNING!

ing position to minimize the risk of se-

vere injury or death in the event of a

crash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much

worse. You might suffer internal injuries,

or you could even slide out of the seat

belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your

passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a

single seat belt. People belted together

can crash into one another in a collision,

hurting one another badly. Never use a

lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their

size.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the

risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt

forces won’t be at the strong hip and

pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.

SAFETY

WARNING!

Always wear the lap part of your seat belt

as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you

properly. In a collision, it could even cut

into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat

against your body, without twists. If you

can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-

hicle, take it to your authorized dealer

immediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong

buckle will not protect you properly. The

lap portion could ride too high on your

body, possibly causing internal injuries.

Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not

protect you properly. In a sudden stop,

you could move too far forward, increas-

ing the possibility of injury. Wear your

seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is

dangerous. Your body could strike the

inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-

sion, increasing head and neck injury. A

seat belt worn under the arm can cause

WARNING!

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as

shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over

your shoulder so that your strongest

bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will

not protect you from injury during a

collision. You are more likely to hit your

head in a collision if you do not wear

your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder

belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart

in a collision and leave you with no

protection. Inspect the seat belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or

loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble

or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a

collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit

back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back

of the front seat, and next to your arm in

the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a

rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull

out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up

the webbing as far as necessary to allow

the seat belt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,

insert the latch plate into the buckle until

you hear a “click.”

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

1 — Seat Belt

2 — Seat Belt Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and

lies low across your hips, below your ab-

domen. To remove slack in the lap belt

portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To

loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the

latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug

seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under

the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any

slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red

button on the buckle. The seat belt will

automatically retract to its stowed posi-

tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to

retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a

twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-

sible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)

above the latch plate, grasp and twist the

seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a

fold that begins immediately above the

latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the

folded webbing. The folded webbing must

enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it

clears the folded webbing and the seat

belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the

top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted

upward or downward to position the seat belt

away from your neck. Push or squeeze the

anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that

serves you best.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage

SAFETY

As a guide, if you are shorter than average,

you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in

a lower position, and if you are taller than

average, you will prefer the shoulder belt

anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it

up or down to make sure that it is locked in

position.

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-

age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This

feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to

be adjusted in the upward position without

pushing or squeezing the release button. To

verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,

pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-

age until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much

worse. You might suffer internal injuries,

or you could even slide out of the seat

belt. Follow these instructions to wear

WARNING!

your seat belt safely and to keep your

passengers safe, too.

• Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any

slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

• Misadjustment of the seat belt could

reduce the effectiveness of the safety

belt in a crash.

Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating

Instructions

The second row center seat belt features a

seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle,

which allows the seat belt to detach from the

lower anchor when the seat is folded. The

mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can

then be stored out of the way in the right side

trim panel for added convenience to open up

utilization of the storage areas behind the

front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular

latch plate from its stowed position in the

right rear side trim panel.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the

seat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of

the right head restraint.

Mini-Latch Stowage

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,

insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-

buckle until you hear a “click.”

Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate

up the webbing as far as necessary to allow

the seat belt to go around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,

insert the latch plate into the buckle until

you hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and

lies low across your hips, below your ab-

domen. To remove slack in the lap belt

portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To

loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on

the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the

risk of sliding under the seat belt in a

collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so

that it is comfortable and not resting on

your neck. The retractor will withdraw any

slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red

button on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from

the mini-buckle for storage, insert the

regular latch plate into the black button

on the top of the mini-buckle. The seat

belt will automatically retract to its

stowed position. If necessary, slide the

latch plate down the webbing to allow

the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the

mini-latch plate and regular latch plate

into its stowed position.

Mini-Latch Plate Buckled

Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled

Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle

SAFETY

WARNING!

• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle

are not properly connected when the

seat belt is used by an occupant, the

seat belt will not be able to provide

proper restraint and will increase the risk

of injury in a collision.

• When reattaching the mini-latch plate

and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt

webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is

twisted, follow the preceding procedure

to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, untwist the webbing, and reat-

tach the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,

even when the webbing is fully extended and

the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage

(if equipped) is in its lowest position, your

authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat

Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should

be used only if the existing seat belt is not

long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is

not required for a different occupant, it must

be removed.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is

physically required in order to properly

fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT

USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when

worn, the distance between the front

edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle

and the center of the occupant’s body is

LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not

needed can increase the risk of serious

injury or death in a collision. Only use

the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt

is not long enough and only use in the

recommended seating positions. Re-

move and store the Seat Belt Extender

when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants

including pregnant women: the risk of injury

in the event of an accident is reduced for the

mother and the unborn child if they are wear-

ing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the

abdomen and across the strong bones of the

hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest

and away from the neck. Never place the

shoulder belt behind the back or under the

arm.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with

pretensioning devices that are designed to

remove slack from the seat belt in the event

of a collision. These devices may improve the

performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision.

Pretensioners work for all size occupants,

including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper

seat belt placement by the occupant. The

seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-

tioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-

pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air

bags, the pretensioners are single use items.

A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag

must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an

Energy Management feature in the front seat-

ing positions that may help further reduce the

risk of injury in the event of a collision. The

seat belt system has a retractor assembly that

is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-

tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used

to secure a child restraint system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-

der the “Child Restraints” section of this

manual. The figure below illustrates the lock-

ing feature for each seating position.

If the passenger seating position is equipped

with an ALR and is being used for normal

usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far

enough to comfortably wrap around the occu-

pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the

ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a

clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow

the webbing to retract completely in this case

and then carefully pull out only the amount of

webbing necessary to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the

latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

"click."

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor

SAFETY

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder

belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat

belt will still retract to remove any slack in the

shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking

Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in

a seating position that has a seat belt with

this feature. Children 12 years old and under

should always be properly restrained in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder

belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-

ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat

belt retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This indicates the seat belt is now

in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt

and allow it to retract completely to disen-

gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti-

vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-

ing mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced

if the switchable Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat

belt function is not working properly

when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly

could increase the risk of injury in colli-

sions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode

to restrain occupants who are wearing

the seat belt or children who are using

booster seats. The locked mode is only

WARNING!

used to install rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraints that have a har-

ness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployable

components, and vehicles with this equip-

ment cannot be readily identified by any

markings, only through visual inspection of

the head restraint. The head restraint will be

split in two halves, with the front half being

soft foam and trim, the back half being deco-

rative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) de-

termines whether the severity or type of rear

impact will require the Active Head Re-

straints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact

requires deployment, both the driver and

front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the

front half of the head restraint extends for-

ward to minimize the gap between the back of

the occupant’s head and the AHR. This sys-

tem is designed to help prevent or reduce the

extent of injuries to the driver and front

passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE:

The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or

may not deploy in the event of a front or side

impact. However, if during a front impact, a

secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may

deploy based on the severity and type of the

impact.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit in a

vehicle’s seat until the head restraints

are placed in their proper positions in

order to minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a collision.

• Do not place items over the top of the

Active Head Restraint, such as coats,

seat covers or portable DVD players.

These items may interfere with the op-

eration of the Active Head Restraint in

the event of a collision and could result

in serious injury or death.

• Active Head Restraints may be deployed

if they are struck by an object such as a

hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-

dental deployment of the Active Head

Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-

cured, as loose cargo could contact the

Active Head Restraint during sudden

stops. Failure to follow this warning

could cause personal injury if the Active

Head Restraint is deployed.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft

Foam And Trim)

2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decora-

tive Plastic Rear Cover)

3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes

4 — Seatback

SAFETY

NOTE:

For more information on properly adjusting

and positioning the head restraint, refer to

“Supplemental Active Head Restraints —

Front Seats” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-

hicle.”

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered

during a collision, the front half of the head

restraint will be extended forward and sepa-

rated from the rear half of the head restraint

(See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after

the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint

must be reset into the original position to best

protect the occupant for all types of colli-

sions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must

reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat before driving. Personally

attempting to reset the AHRs may result in

damage to the AHRs that could impair their

function.

WARNING!

Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect

you in all types of collisions. Have de-

ployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealer

immediately.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this

section may be standard equipment on some

models, or may be optional equipment on

others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-

rized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect

you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir-

cuits and interconnecting wiring associated

with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-

nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the

following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the

electronic parts of the air bag system when-

ever the ignition switch is in the START or

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Triggered

ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in

the OFF position or in the ACC position, the

air bag system is not on and the air bags will

not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply

system that may deploy the air bag system

even if the battery loses power or it becomes

disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light

in the instrument panel for approximately

four to eight seconds for a self-check when

the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN

position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects

a malfunction in any part of the system, it

turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either

momentarily or continuously. A single chime

will sound to alert you if the light comes on

again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will

illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag

Warning Light if a malfunction is detected

that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the

malfunction. While the air bag system is

designed to be maintenance free, if any of

the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immedi-

ately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come

on during the four to eight seconds when

the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN

position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on

after the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-

mittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-

gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-

cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also

be disabled. In this condition the air bags

may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your

instrument panel could mean you won’t

have the air bag system to protect you in a

WARNING!

collision. If the light does not come on as a

bulb check when the ignition is first

turned on, stays on after you start the

vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have

an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/

shoulder belts for both the driver and front

passenger. The front air bags are a supple-

ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The

driver front air bag is mounted in the center

of the steering wheel. The passenger front air

bag is mounted in the instrument panel,

above the glove compartment. The words

“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed

on the air bag covers.

SAFETY

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or

instrument panel during front air bag

deployment could cause serious injury,

WARNING!

including death. Air bags need room to

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending

your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-

tistage driver and front passenger air bags.

This system provides output appropriate to

the severity and type of collision as deter-

mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC), which may receive information from

the front impact sensors (if equipped) or

other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-

ately during an impact that requires air bag

deployment. A low energy output is used in

less severe collisions. A higher energy output

is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver

and/or front passenger seat belt buckle

switch that detects whether the driver or front

passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt

buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of

the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver

and/or front passenger seat track position

sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of

the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat

position.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near

the air bag on the instrument panel or

steering wheel because any such objects

could cause harm if the vehicle is in a

collision severe enough to cause the air

bag to inflate.

Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster

Locations

1—

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster

3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster

WARNING!

• Do not put anything on or around the air

bag covers or attempt to open them

manually. You may damage the air bags

and you could be injured because the air

bags may no longer be functional. The

protective covers for the air bag cushions

are designed to open only when the air

bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead

to more severe injuries in a collision. The

air bags work with your seat belt to

restrain you properly. In some collisions,

air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear

your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat

belts. Front air bags are not expected to

reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or

rollover collisions. The front air bags will not

deploy in all frontal collisions, including

some that may produce substantial vehicle

damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type

and location of impact, front air bags may

deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end

damage but that produce a severe initial

deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle

deceleration over time, vehicle speed and

damage by themselves are not good indica-

tors of whether or not an air bag should have

deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in

all collisions, and also are needed to help

keep you in position, away from an inflating

air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring

the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.

A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated

to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the

upper right side of the instrument panel

separate and fold out of the way as the air

bags inflate to their full size. The front air

bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The front air bags then

quickly deflate while helping to restrain the

driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the

knees of the driver and front passenger, and

position the front occupants for improved

interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee

impact bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the

knee impact bolsters such as alarm

lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of

side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs): Located in the outboard side of the

front seats. The SABs are marked with a

“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into

the outboard side of the seats.

SAFETY

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of

occupant injury during certain side im-

pacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in

addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body struc-

ture.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam

on the outboard side of the seatback’s

trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys

through the seat seam into the space

between the occupant and the door. The

SAB moves at a very high speed and with

such a high force that it could injure

occupants if they are not seated properly,

or if items are positioned in the area

where the SAB inflates. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploy-

ing air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place

objects between you and the Side Air

Bags; the performance could be adversely

affected and/or objects could be pushed

into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-

tains (SABICs): Located above the side win-

dows. The trim covering the SABICs is la-

beled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head

or other injuries to front and rear seat

outboard occupants in certain side im-

pacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in

addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body struc-

ture.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering

the side windows. An inflating SABIC

pushes the outside edge of the trim out of

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

Label

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-

tain (SABIC) Label Location

the way and covers the window. The

SABICs inflate with enough force to in-

jure occupants if they are not belted and

seated properly, or if items are positioned

in the area where the SABICs inflate.

Children are at an even greater risk of

injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the deployment of

the SABICs. The trim covering above the

side windows where the SABIC and its

deployment path are located should re-

main free from any obstructions.

• In order for the SABICs to work as in-

tended, do not install any accessory

items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket

sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof

racks that require permanent attach-

ments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the

roof of the vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are

designed to activate in certain side impacts

and certain rollover events. The Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC) determines

whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags

in a particular side impact or rollover event is

appropriate, based on the severity and type of

collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a

good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags

should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat

belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in

less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags

can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-

pants, including children, should never

lean on or sleep against the door, side

windows, or area where the side air bags

inflate, even if they are in an infant or

child restraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints where

appropriate) are necessary for your pro-

WARNING!

tection in all collisions. They also help

keep you in position, away from an in-

flating Side Air Bag. To get the best

protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-

pants must wear their seat belts properly

and sit upright with their backs against

the seats. Children must be properly

restrained in a child restraint or booster

seat that is appropriate for the size of the

child.

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do

not lean against the door or window. Sit

upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags

during deployment could cause you to

be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could

lead to more severe injuries in a colli-

sion. The Side Air Bags work with your

seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt

even though you have Side Air Bags.

SAFETY

100

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open during air bag

deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid

the ORC in determining the appropriate re-

sponse to impact events. The system is cali-

brated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the

impact side of the vehicle during impacts

that require Side Air Bag occupant protec-

tion. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags de-

ploy independently; a left side impact de-

ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right

side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags

only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side

collisions, including some collisions at cer-

tain angles, or some side collisions that do

not impact the area of the passenger com-

partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy

during angled or offset frontal collisions

where the front air bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in

certain rollover events. The ORC determines

whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags

in a particular rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision.

Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indica-

tor of whether or not Side Air Bags should

have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all

rollover events. The rollover sensing-system

determines if a rollover event may be in

progress and whether deployment is appro-

priate. A slower-developing event may deploy

the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of

the vehicle. A faster-developing event may

deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as

the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle.

The rollover sensing-system may also deploy

the seat belt pretensioners, with or without

the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle

if the vehicle experiences a near rollover

event.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of

partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-

pants through side windows in certain roll-

over or side impact events.

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

monitors the internal circuits and intercon-

necting wiring associated with electrical Air

Bag System Components listed below:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

101

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in

all collisions. This does not mean something

is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the

air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause

abrasions and/or skin reddening to the

occupants as the air bags deploy and un-

fold. The abrasions are similar to friction

rope burns or those you might get sliding

along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They

are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal

quickly. However, if you haven’t healed

significantly within a few days, or if you

have any blistering, see your doctor imme-

diately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some

smoke-like particles. The particles are a

normal by-product of the process that gen-

erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag

inflation. These airborne particles may ir-

ritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you

have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area

with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-

tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these par-

ticles settle on your clothing, follow the

garment manufacturer’s instructions for

cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags

have deployed. If you are involved in another

collision, the air bags will not be in place to

protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-

sioners cannot protect you in another col-

lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-

sioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized

dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-

pant Restraint Controller System serviced

as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open during air

bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be

taken to an authorized dealer

immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communica-

tion network remains intact, and the power

remains intact, depending on the nature of

the event, the ORC will determine whether to

have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery

has power or until the hazard light button

is pressed. The hazard lights can be deac-

tivated by pressing the hazard light but-

ton.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain

on as long as the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.

SAFETY

102

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-

sponse System functions after an event, the

ignition switch must be changed from igni-

tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care-

fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the

engine compartment and on the ground near

the engine compartment and fuel tank before

resetting the system and starting the engine.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag

system could cause it to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air

bag system is not there to protect you.

Do not modify the components or wiring,

including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim

cover or the upper right side of the in-

strument panel. Do not modify the front

bumper, vehicle body structure, or add

aftermarket side steps or running

boards.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of

the air bag system yourself. Be sure to

tell anyone who works on your vehicle

that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your

air bag system. The air bag may inflate

accidentally or may not function prop-

erly if modifications are made. Take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, in-

cluding your trim cover and cushion,

needs to be serviced in any way (includ-

ing removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle

to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-

turer approved seat accessories may be

used. If it is necessary to modify the air

bag system for persons with disabilities,

contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time, typically

30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

• These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

103

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if

a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) are re-

corded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying data

routinely acquired during a crash investiga-

tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they

have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled

up at all times, including babies and chil-

dren. Every state in the United States, and

every Canadian province, requires that small

children ride in proper restraint systems. This

is the law, and you can be prosecuted for

ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride

properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-

able. According to crash statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the rear

seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can

become a projectile inside the vehicle.

The force required to hold even an infant

on your lap could become so great that you

could not hold the child, no matter how

strong you are. The child and others could

be badly injured. Any child riding in your

vehicle should be in a proper restraint for

the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of re-

straints for children from newborn size to the

child almost large enough for an adult safety

belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow

all the instructions and warnings in the child

restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la-

bels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make

sure that it has a label certifying that it meets

all applicable Safety Standards. You should

also make sure that you can install it in the

vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to

www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or

call: 1–888–327–4236

• Canadian residents should refer to Trans-

port Canada’s website for additional infor-

mation: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/

motorvehiclesafety/

safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

SAFETY

104

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers

Children who are two years old or younger and

who have not reached the height or weight lim-

its of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child

Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of

the vehicle

Small Children

Children who are at least two years old or who

have out-grown the height or weight limit of

their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-

point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat

of the vehicle

Larger Children

Children who have out-grown their forward-

facing child restraint, but are too small to prop-

erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle

seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have

out-grown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the

vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride

rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two

years old or until they reach either the height

or weight limit of their rear-facing child re-

straint. Two types of child restraints can be

used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-

ible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in

the vehicle. It is recommended for children

from birth until they reach the weight or

height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible

child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible

child seats often have a higher weight limit in

the rear-facing direction than infant carriers

do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-

dren who have outgrown their infant carrier

but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they

reach the highest weight or height allowed by

their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

105

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have

outgrown their rear-facing convertible child

seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child seats and convertible

child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years

old or who have outgrown the rear-facing

weight or height limit of their rear-facing

convertible child seat. Children should re-

main in a forward-facing child seat with a

harness for as long as possible, up to the

highest weight or height allowed by the child

seat.

All children whose weight or height is above

the forward-facing limit for the child seat

should use a belt-positioning booster seat

until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If

the child cannot sit with knees bent over the

vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back

is against the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child and

belt-positioning booster seat are held in the

vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure

of an infant or child restraint. It could

come loose in a collision. The child

could be badly injured or killed. Follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-

tions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the

vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat

forward or rearward because it can

loosen the child restraint attachments.

Remove the child restraint before ad-

justing the vehicle seat position. When

the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-

install the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use,

secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt

or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from

the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the

vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks

and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the

shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are

long enough to bend over the front of the seat

when their back is against the seatback,

should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use

this simple 5-step test to decide whether the

child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against

the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably

over the front of the vehicle seat – while

they are still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s

shoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs and

not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the

whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was

“no,” then the child still needs to use a

booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is

using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt

fit periodically and make sure the seat belt

SAFETY

106

buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position. If

the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,

move the child closer to the center of the

vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the

seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt

under an arm or behind their back. In a

crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a

child properly, which may result in serious

WARNING!

injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the

seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight of the

Child + Child Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH – Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top Tether

Anchor

Rear-Facing Child Re-

straint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing Child Re-

straint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

107

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-

straint anchorage system called LATCH,

which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren. The LATCH system has three

vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower

anchorages located at the back of the seat

cushion where it meets the seatback and one

top tether anchorage located behind the seat-

ing position. These anchorages are used to

install LATCH-equipped child seats without

using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating

positions may have a top tether anchorage

but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the

top tether anchorage to install the child re-

straint. Please see the following table for

more information.

Latch Positions For Installing Child Re-

straints In This Vehicle

LATCH Label

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An-

chorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY

108

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the

LATCH anchorage system to attach the child

restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt

and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system

once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt

be used together to attach a rear-facing or

forward-facing child restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-

facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-

tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?

Yes

You can install child restraints with flexible

lower anchors in the center position. The inner

anchorages are 15.5 inches (390 mm) apart.

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower

anchors in the center position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a

common lower LATCH anchorage?

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or

more child restraints. If the center position

does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-

ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in

the center position next to a child seat using

the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the

back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front

passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-

turer also allows contact. See your child re-

straint owner’s manual for more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? No

109

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback. They are just visible

when you lean into the rear seat to install the

child restraint. You will easily feel them if you

run your finger along the gap between the

seatback and seat cushion.

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind

each rear seating position located on the

back of the seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems

will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible

strap on each side. Each will have a hook or

connector to attach to the lower anchorage

and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints

and some rear-facing child restraints will also

be equipped with a tether strap. The tether

strap will have a hook at the end to attach to

the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH: Four Door

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower

attachments in the center seating position.

Only install this type of child restraint in the

outboard seating positions. Child restraints

with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-

ments can be installed in any rear seating

position.

Lower LATCH Anchors

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

SAFETY

110

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to

attach more than one child restraint. If you

are installing LATCH-compatible child re-

straints next to each other, you must use

the seat belt for the center position. You

can then use either the LATCH anchors or

the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child

seats in the outboard positions. Please

refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible

Child Restraint System” for typical instal-

lation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child re-

straint manufacturer when installing your child

restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be

installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-

straint

If the selected seating position has a Switch-

able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat

belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-

tions below. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to

check what type of seat belt each seating

position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps

and on the tether strap of the child seat so

that you can more easily attach the hooks

or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower

anchorages for that seating position. For

some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat

can be moved forward and rearward in the

vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front

seat forward to allow more room for the

child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of

the child restraint to the lower anchorages

in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,

connect it to the top tether anchorage.

See the section “Installing Child Re-

straints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”

for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the

child restraint rearward and downward

into the seat. Remove slack in the straps

according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed

tightly by pulling back and forth on the

child seat at the belt path. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any

direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt

When using the LATCH attaching system to

install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat

belts that are not being used by other occu-

pants or being used to secure child restraints.

An unused belt could injure a child if they

play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt

retractor. Before installing a child restraint

using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt

behind the child restraint and out of the

child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-

feres with the child restraint installation, in-

stead of buckling it behind the child re-

straint, route the seat belt through the child

restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not

111

lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the

vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and

that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint

to the LATCH anchorages can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed. Follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child

restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-

der no circumstances are they to be

used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or

for attaching other items or equipment

to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve-

hicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the

lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to prop-

erly secure a child restraint can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s directions exactly when installing an

infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the rear passenger seating

positions are equipped with a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is

designed to keep the lap portion of the seat

belt tight around the child restraint so that it

is not necessary to use a locking clip. The

ALR retractor can be “switched” into a

locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out

of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,

the ALR will make a clicking noise while the

webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de-

scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Re-

straint Systems” for additional information

on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following

sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY

112

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the

Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a

forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child

Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a

forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit

of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the

back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is

allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? No

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the

seat belt against the belt path of the child re-

straint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re-

tractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-

able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap

belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to prop-

erly secure a child restraint can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed.

WARNING!

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an in-

fant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the

seating position. For some second row

seats, you may need to recline the seat

and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you

may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-

tion to make room for the child seat. You

may also move the front seat forward to

allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from

the retractor to pass it through the belt

path of the child restraint. Do not twist the

belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until

you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap

portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the

shoulder part of the belt until you have

113

pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the

retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-

tract back into the retractor. As the web-

bing retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This means the seat belt is now in

the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.

If it is locked, you should not be able to

pull out any webbing. If the retractor is

not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to

tighten the lap portion around the child

restraint while you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the vehicle

seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap

and the seating position has a top tether

anchorage, connect the tether strap to the

anchorage and tighten the tether strap.

See the section “Installing Child Re-

straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”

for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed

tightly by pulling back and forth on the

child seat at the belt path. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any

direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so

check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if

necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Top

Tether Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-

facing car seat to any location in front of

the car seat, including the seat frame or a

tether anchorage. Only attach the tether

strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating

position, located behind the top of the

vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)

Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

WARNING!

1. Look behind the seating position where

you plan to install the child restraint to

find the tether anchorage. You may need

to move the seat forward to provide better

access to the tether anchorage. If there is

no top tether anchorage for that seating

position, move the child restraint to an-

other position in the vehicle if one is

available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most

direct path for the strap between the an-

chor and the child seat, routing it over the

center of the head restraint.

SAFETY

114

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child

restraint to the top tether anchorage as

shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-

ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap

could lead to increased head motion and

possible injury to the child. Use only the

anchorage position directly behind the

child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split

rear seat, make sure the tether strap

does not slip into the opening between

the seatbacks as you remove slack in the

strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could

harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be

thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a

passenger during panic braking or in a colli-

sion.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in

pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured

by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE

CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior

heat build-up may cause serious injury

or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

WARNING!

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-

tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-

orless and odorless. Breathing it can make

you unconscious and can eventually poi-

son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow

these safety tips since vehicle equipped

with a gas engine the following applies:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage

or in confined areas any longer than

needed to move your vehicle in or out of

the area.

• If you are required to drive with the

trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure

that all windows are closed and the cli-

mate control BLOWER switch is set at

high speed. DO NOT use the recircula-

tion mode.

115

WARNING!

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle

with the engine running, adjust your

heating or cooling controls to force out-

side air into the vehicle. Set the blower

at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide

entry into the vehicle body is a properly

maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of

the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can

be detected inside the vehicle, or when the

underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,

have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-

eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or

mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose

connections could permit exhaust fumes to

seep into the passenger compartment. In

addition, inspect the exhaust system each

time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil

change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-

ately. Do not disassemble or modify the sys-

tem.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced

after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies

must be replaced after a collision if they have

been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding

seat belt or retractor condition, replace the

seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for

four to eight seconds as a bulb check when

the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.

If the light is either not on during starting,

stays on, or turns on while driving, have the

system inspected at an authorized dealer as

soon as possible. This light will illuminate

with a single chime when a fault with the Air

Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will

stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light

comes on intermittently or remains on while

driving, have an authorized dealer service the

vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Re-

straint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-

mation.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost

mode and place the blower control on high

speed. You should be able to feel the air

directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster

is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your

vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not

interfere with the operation of the accelera-

tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor

mat that is securely attached using the floor

mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position

and interfere with the accelerator, brake or

clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your

vehicle in other ways.

SAFETY

116

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded,

or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat

fasteners may cause your floor mat to in-

terfere with the accelerator, brake, or

clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle

control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach

your floor

mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO

NOT install your floor mat upside down

or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to

confirm mat is secured using the floor

mat fasteners on a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING

FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat.

NEVER install or stack an additional

floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit

your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat

that cannot be properly attached and

secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat

needs to be replaced, only use a FCA

approved floor mat for the specific

make, model, and year of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on

the driver’s side floor area. To check for

interference, with the vehicle properly

parked with the engine off, fully depress

the accelerator, the brake, and the

clutch pedal (if present) to check for

interference. If your floor mat interferes

with the operation of any pedal, or is not

secure to the floor, remove the floor mat

from the vehicle and place the floor mat

in your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat

on the passenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or

slide into the driver’s side floor area

when the vehicle is moving. Objects can

become trapped under accelerator,

brake, or clutch pedals and could cause

a loss of vehicle control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floor

mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-

jects could change the position of the

floor mat and may cause interference

with the accelerator, brake, or clutch

pedals.

WARNING!

• If the vehicle carpet has been removed

and re-installed, always properly attach

carpet to the floor and check the floor

mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle

carpet. Fully depress each pedal to

check for interference with the accelera-

tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-

install the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soap

and water to clean your floor mats. After

cleaning, always check your floor mat

has been properly installed and is se-

cured to your vehicle using the floor mat

fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and

uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,

nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the

tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,

117

cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for

tightness. Check the tires (including spare)

for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake

lights and exterior lights while you work the

controls. Check turn signal and high beam

indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and lock-

ing.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight

parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid

leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or

if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The

cause should be located and corrected imme-

diately.

SAFETY

118

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES ......120

Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .120

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

. .120

Normal Starting ...............120

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or

−30°C) ....................121

If Engine Fails To Start ...........121

After Starting.................121

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDA-

TIONS ....................121

PARKING BRAKE ............122

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF

EQUIPPED.................123

Five-Speed Manual Transmission.....123

Recommended Shift Speeds .......124

Downshifting ................124

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF

EQUIPPED.................124

Key Ignition Park Interlock ........125

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System ....................126

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped ...................126

Continuously Variable Automatic

Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped. . . .127

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —

IF EQUIPPED

...............129

SPEEDCONTROL............129

To Activate ..................130

To Set A Desired Speed ..........130

To Deactivate ................130

To Resume Speed .............130

To Vary The Speed Setting .........130

To Accelerate For Passing .........131

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP

CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED ......131

ADDING FUEL ..............133

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .........133

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ......133

VEHICLELOADING ..........134

Certification Label .............134

TRAILER TOWING ...........136

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) ...............136

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) .........137

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another

Vehicle ....................137

STARTING AND OPERATING

119

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,

adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and

fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

transmission into PARK, apply the park-

ing brake and remove the key fob from

the ignition. When leaving the vehicle,

always lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Before starting the engine fully apply the

parking brake, press the clutch pedal to the

floor, and place the gear selector in NEU-

TRAL.

NOTE:

• The engine will not start unless the clutch

pedal is pressed to the floor.

• If the key will not turn and the steering

wheel is locked, rotate the wheel in either

direction to relieve pressure on the locking

mechanism and then turn the key.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The gear selector must be in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position before you can start the

engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting

to any driving gear.

NOTE:

You must press the brake pedal before shift-

ing out of PARK.

Tip Start

Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition

switch to the START position and release it as

soon as the starter engages. The starter motor

will continue to run, and it will disengage

automatically when the engine is running. If

the engine fails to start, the starter will dis-

engage automatically in 10 seconds. If this

occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat

the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm

engine does not require pumping or pressing

the accelerator pedal. Simply turn the ignition

switch to the START position and release when

the engine starts. If the engine fails to start

within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to

the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then

repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle

to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an

STARTING AND OPERATING

120

WARNING!

automatic transmission cannot be started

this way. Unburned fuel could enter the

catalytic converter and once the engine

has started, ignite and damage the con-

verter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a

discharged battery, booster cables may be

used to obtain a start from another vehicle.

This type of start can be dangerous if done

improperly, so follow the procedure care-

fully. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedure”

in “In Case Of Emergency” for further

information.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or

−30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-

tures, use of an externally powered electric

engine block heater (available from your au-

thorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have

followed the “Normal Starting” and “Extreme

Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded.

Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for

no more than 15 seconds. This should clear

any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

Leave the ignition key in the ON position,

release the accelerator pedal and repeat the

“Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid

into the throttle body air inlet opening in

an attempt to start the vehicle. This could

result in flash fire causing serious personal

injury.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not

crank the engine for more than 15 seconds

at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before

trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically,

and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the

engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)

in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles

(500 km). After the initial 60 miles

(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or

90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration

within the limits of local traffic laws contrib-

utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle

acceleration in low gear can be detrimental

and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the

factory is a high-quality energy conserving

type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis-

tent with anticipated climate conditions un-

der which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality

grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servic-

ing And Maintenance”.

121

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight

Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may

result.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during

its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of

operation. This should be considered a nor-

mal part of the break-in and not interpreted

as a problem.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that

the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be

certain to leave an automatic transmission in

PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE

or first gear.

The parking brake lever is located in the

center console. To apply the parking brake,

pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To

release the parking brake, pull the lever up

slightly, push the center button, then lower

the lever completely.

When the parking brake is applied with the

ignition switch in the ON position, the “Brake

Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will

illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the

automatic transmission is placed in gear,

the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If

vehicle speed is detected, a chime will

sound to alert the driver. Fully release the

parking brake before attempting to move

the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking

brake is applied. It does not show the

degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn

the front wheels toward the curb on a down-

hill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade. For vehicles equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, apply the parking brake

before placing the gear selector in PARK,

otherwise the load on the transmission lock-

ing mechanism may make it difficult to move

the gear selector out of PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied whenever the

driver is not in the vehicle.

Parking Brake

STARTING AND OPERATING

122

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the ignition and lock

your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-

gaged before driving; failure to do so can

lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake

when leaving your vehicle or it may roll

and cause damage or injury. Also, be

certain to leave an automatic transmis-

sion in PARK, a manual transmission in

REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so

WARNING!

may cause the vehicle to roll and cause

damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains

on with the parking brake released, a brake

system malfunction is indicated. Have the

brake system serviced by an authorized

dealer immediately.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION —

IF EQUIPPED

Five-Speed Manual Transmission

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave

the vehicle unattended without having the

parking brake fully applied. The parking

brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an

incline.

Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift

gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly

press the accelerator pedal.

Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip

a gear. Be sure the transmission is in first

gear, (not third), when starting from a stand-

ing position. Damage to the clutch can result

from starting in a gear higher than first gear.

CAUTION!

• Launching in any gear except 1st gear

will result in excessive slipping of the

clutch and potentially lugging or stalling

the engine.

• Use each gear in numerical order, do not

skip a gear. Be sure the transmission is

in first gear, (not third), when starting

from a standing position. Damage to the

clutch can result from starting in a gear

higher than first gear.

For most city driving, you will find it easier to

use only the lower gears. For steady highway

driving with light accelerations, fifth gear is

recommended.

123

Never drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal, and never try to hold the vehicle

on a hill with the clutch pedal partially en-

gaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the

clutch.

Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle

has come to a complete stop.

NOTE:

During cold weather, until the transmission

lubricant is warm, you may experience

slightly higher shift efforts. This is normal

and not harmful to the transmission.

Recommended Shift Speeds

To use your manual transmission for optimal

fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed

in the following table.

Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds

Units in mph (km/h)

Engine Size Acceleration Rate 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5

All Engines

Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)

Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)

Downshifting

Proper downshifting will improve fuel

economy and prolong engine life.

CAUTION!

If you skip a gear while downshifting or

downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,

these conditions may cause the engine to

overspeed if too low of a gear is selected

and the clutch pedal is released. Damage

to the clutch and the transmission can

CAUTION!

result from skipping a gear while down-

shifting or downshifting at too high of a

vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is

held pressed (i.e., not released).

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake

life, shift down to second or first gear when

descending a steep grade.

When turning a corner or driving up a steep

grade, downshift early so that the engine will

not be overburdened.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION — IF

EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if

the following precautions are not ob-

served:

STARTING AND OPERATING

124

CAUTION!

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE

only after the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is

above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure

your foot is firmly pressing the brake

pedal.

NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal

while shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher

than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly

pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle

could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the

vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is

WARNING!

idling normally and your foot is firmly

pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle

could injure those in or near the vehicle.

As with all vehicles, you should never

exit a vehicle while the engine is run-

ning. Before exiting a vehicle always

apply the parking brake, shift the trans-

mission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,

and remove the ignition key. Once the

key is removed, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle

against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the ignition key from the vehicle and

lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the transmission

gear selector.

WARNING!

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near

the vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children). A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition

Park Interlock which requires the transmis-

sion to be in PARK before the ignition switch

can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)

position. The key can only be removed from

the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/

OFF position, and once removed the trans-

mission is locked in PARK.

NOTE:

If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap

the key in the ignition switch to warn you that

this safety feature is inoperable. The engine

can be started and stopped but the key can-

not be removed until you obtain service.

125

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-

mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that

holds the gear selector in PARK unless the

brakes are applied. To shift the transmission

out of PARK, the ignition switch must be

turned to the ON/RUN position (engine run-

ning or not) and the brake pedal must be

pressed.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped

The transmission gear position display (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) indicates the

transmission gear range. You must press the

brake pedal to move the gear selector out of

PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift In-

terlock System” in this section). To drive,

move the gear selector from PARK or NEU-

TRAL to the DRIVE position.

The electronically-controlled transmission

provides a precise shift schedule. The trans-

mission electronics are self-calibrating;

therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle

may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop

within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE

when the accelerator pedal is released and

the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your

foot on the brake pedal when shifting be-

tween these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only

PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE

shift positions. Manual shifts can be made

using the AutoStick shift control (refer to

“AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmis-

sion)” in this section). Moving the gear selec-

tor to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE

position will manually select the transmis-

sion gear, and will display the current gear in

the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

AutoStick (Six-Speed Automatic Transmis-

sion) — If Equipped

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission

feature providing manual shift control, giving

you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick

allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-

nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,

and improve overall vehicle performance.

This system can also provide you with more

control during passing, city driving, cold slip-

pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer

towing, and many other situations.

Operation

When the gear selector is in the DRIVE posi-

tion, the transmission will operate automati-

cally, shifting between the six available

gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap the

gear selector to the right or left (+/-) while in

the DRIVE position. Tapping (-) to enter

AutoStick mode will downshift the transmis-

sion to the next lower gear, while using (+) to

enter AutoStick mode will retain the current

gear. When AutoStick is active, the current

transmission gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will

shift up or down when the driver moves the

gear selector to the right (+) or left (-), unless

an engine lugging or overspeed condition

would result. It will remain in the selected

STARTING AND OPERATING

126

gear until another upshift or downshift is

chosen, except as described below:

• The transmission will automatically up-

shift when necessary to prevent engine

over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically down-

shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent en-

gine lugging) and will display the current

gear.

• The transmission will automatically down-

shift to first gear when coming to a stop.

After a stop, the driver should manually

upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle

is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or

second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will

allow starting in second gear. Starting out

in second gear can be helpful in snowy or

icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause the

engine to overspeed, that shift will not

occur.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick

is engaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more notice-

able when AutoStick is engaged.

• The system may revert to automatic shift

mode if a fault or overheat condition is

detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear

selector to the right (+) until “D” is once

again displayed in the instrument cluster.

You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode

at any time without taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking on a slippery surface. The drive

wheels could lose their grip and the ve-

hicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

Continuously Variable Automatic

Transmission (CVT) — If Equipped

The transmission gear position display (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) indicates the

transmission gear range. You must press the

brake pedal to move the gear selector out of

PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift In-

terlock System” in this section). To drive,

move the gear selector from PARK or NEU-

TRAL to the DRIVE position.

NOTE:

The Continuously Variable Automatic Trans-

mission (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous

manner. This may sometimes "feel" as if it is

slipping, but this is normal and does not

harm anything.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE

when the accelerator pedal is released and

the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your

foot on the brake pedal when shifting be-

tween these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only

PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE

shift positions. Manual shifts can be made

using the AutoStick shift control (refer to

"AutoStick (CVT)" in this section). Moving the

gear selector to the left or right (-/+) while in

the DRIVE position will manually select from

a set of predefined transmission gear ratios,

and will display the current gear in the instru-

ment cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

127

AutoStick (CVT) — If Equipped

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission

feature providing six manually selectable

gear ratios, giving you more control of the

vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize

engine braking, eliminate undesirable up-

shifts and downshifts, and improve overall

vehicle performance. This system can also

provide you with more control during passing,

city driving, cold slippery conditions, moun-

tain driving, trailer towing, and many other

situations.

Operation

NOTE:

AutoStick is not available until the CVT

warms up in cold weather.

When the gear selector is in the DRIVE posi-

tion, AutoStick is activated by moving the

gear selector side-to-side. Moving the gear

selector to the right (+) will activate

AutoStick and shift up to the next higher

manual ratio, unless you are already operat-

ing in or near Overdrive, in which case sixth

gear ratio will be selected. In like manner,

moving the gear selector to the left (-) will

activate AutoStick and shift to the next lower

manual ratio. The manually-selected gear

will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will

shift up or down when (+/-) is manually se-

lected by the driver, unless an engine lugging

or overspeed condition would result. It will

remain in the selected gear until another

upshift or downshift is chosen, except as

described below:

• The transmission will automatically up-

shift when necessary to prevent engine

over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically down-

shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent en-

gine lugging) and will display the current

gear.

• The transmission will automatically down-

shift to first gear when coming to a stop.

After a stop, the driver should manually

upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle

is accelerated.

• If a requested downshift would cause the

engine to overspeed, that shift will not

occur.

• Transmission shifting will be more notice-

able when AutoStick is engaged.

• Heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ap-

plication will disengage AutoStick mode.

• The system may revert to automatic shift

mode if a fault or overheat condition is

detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear

selector to the right (+) until “D” is once

again displayed in the instrument cluster.

You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode

at any time without taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking on a slippery surface. The drive

wheels could lose their grip and the ve-

hicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING

128

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED

This feature provides full time, on-demand,

four–wheel drive (4WD).

Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or

if additional traction is needed in sand, deep

snow, or loose traction surfaces, activate the

“4WD LOCK” switch by pulling up once and

releasing. This locks the center coupling al-

lowing more torque to be sent to the rear

wheels. The “4WD Indicator Light” will come

on in the cluster. This can be done on the fly,

at any vehicle speed. To deactivate, simply

pull on the switch one more time. The “4WD

Indicator Light” will then go out.

NOTE:

Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in

“Safety” for further information.

SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than

25 mph (40 km/h).

The Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the

Speed Control System has been designed to

Four-Wheel Drive Switch

Speed Control Buttons

1 — Push Cancel

2 — Push On/Off

3 — Push Resume/Accel

4 — Push Set/Decel

129

shut down if multiple Speed Control func-

tions are operated at the same time. If this

occurs, the Speed Control System can be

reactivated by pushing the Speed Control

on/off button and resetting the desired ve-

hicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the on/off button. The cruise control

indicator light in the instrument cluster dis-

play will illuminate. To turn the system off,

push the on/off button a second time. The

cruise control indicator light will turn off. The

system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when

not in use is dangerous. You could acci-

dentally set the system or cause it to go

faster than you want. You could lose con-

trol and have an accident. Always leave the

system off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle

has reached the desired speed, push the SET

(-) button and release. Release the accelera-

tor and the vehicle will operate at the se-

lected speed.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady

speed and on level ground before pushing the

SET (-) button.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the

CANC button or normal brake pressure while

slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed

Control without erasing the set speed from

memory.

Pushing the on/off button or turning the igni-

tion to the OFF position erases the set speed

from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the

RES (+) button and release. Resume can be

used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected

through the instrument panel settings if

equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more

information. The speed increment shown is

dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will

result in a 1 mph increase in set speed.

Each subsequent tap of the button results

in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to increase until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

STARTING AND OPERATING

130

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will re-

sult in a 1 km/h increase in set speed.

Each subsequent tap of the button results

in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to increase until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected

through the instrument panel settings if

equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more

information. The speed increment shown is

dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result

in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each

subsequent tap of the button results in a

decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to decrease until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result

in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each

subsequent tap of the button results in a

decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to decrease until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally.

When the pedal is released, the vehicle will

return to the set speed.

Using Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to

maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:

The Speed Control system maintains speed

up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain

may occur so it may be preferable to drive

without Speed Control.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed.

Your vehicle could go too fast for the con-

ditions, and you could lose control and

have an accident. Do not use Speed Con-

trol in heavy traffic or on roads that are

winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP

CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the

ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows

you to see an on-screen image of the rear

surroundings of your vehicle whenever the

gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image

will be displayed on the touchscreen along

with a caution note to “check entire sur-

roundings” across the top of the screen. After

131

five seconds, this note will disappear. The

ParkView camera is located on the rear of the

vehicle above the rear license plate.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE,

the rear camera mode is exited and the last

selected touchscreen appears again.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera

Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear

camera image will be displayed for up to

10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of

REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed

exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission

is shifted into PARK or the vehicle’s ignition

is cycled to the OFF position.

Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the

vehicle. The static grid lines will show sepa-

rate zones that will help indicate the distance

to the rear of the vehicle. Different colored

zones indicate the distance to the rear of the

vehicle. The following table shows the ap-

proximate distances for each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the ParkView Rear Back

Up Camera. Always check carefully behind

your vehicle, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing

up. You are responsible for the safety of

your surroundings and must continue to

pay attention while backing up. Failure to

do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView

should only be used as a parking aid.

The ParkView camera is unable to view

every obstacle or object in your drive

path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle

must be driven slowly when using

ParkView to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is seen. It is recommended

CAUTION!

that the driver look frequently over his/

her shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,

rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth. Do

not cover the lens.

STARTING AND OPERATING

132

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on

the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is

lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap

is for use with this vehicle.

After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap

tether cable over a hook on the inside of the

fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended

away from and protects the vehicle's surface.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission

control system could result from using

an improper fuel tank filler cap. A poorly

fitting cap could let impurities into the

fuel system.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause

the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

to turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do

not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in

or near the vehicle when the gas cap is

removed or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is run-

ning. This is in violation of most state

and federal fire regulations and may

cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped

into a portable container that is inside of

a vehicle. You could be burned. Always

WARNING!

place gas containers on the ground while

filling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,

the fuel tank is full.

• Tighten the gas cap about ¼ turn until you

hear one click. This is an indication that

cap is properly tightened.

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the

MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is

tightened every time the vehicle is

refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly

installed, a “gASCAP” message will be dis-

played in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the

instrument cluster. Refer to “Warning And

Indicator Lights” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push

the odometer/trip odometer RESET button to

turn the message off. If the problem contin-

Fuel Filler Cap

133

ues, the message will appear the next time

the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard

Diagnostic System” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration regulations, your ve-

hicle has a certification label affixed to the

driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of

manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)

number is included on this label and indi-

cates the Month, Day and Hour of manufac-

ture. The bar code that appears on the bot-

tom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of

your vehicle including driver, passengers, ve-

hicle, options and cargo. The label also

specifies maximum capacities of front and

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be

limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR

are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the

allowable load weight a truck can carry, in-

cluding the weight of the driver, all passen-

gers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load

on the front and rear axles. The load must be

distributed in the cargo area so that the

GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the com-

ponents in the system with the lowest load

carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or

wheels). Heavier axles or suspension compo-

nents sometimes specified by purchasers for

increased durability does not necessarily in-

crease the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification La-

bel represents the actual tire size on your

vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to

the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the

tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your

vehicle for all loading conditions up to full

GAWR.

STARTING AND OPERATING

134

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the

total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,

including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi-

tions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded

into the vehicle. The front and rear curb

weight values are determined by weighing

your vehicle on a commercial scale before

any occupants or cargo are added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the

front and rear of your vehicle at the ground

can best be determined by weighing it when it

is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on

a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR

has not been exceeded. The weight on the

front and rear of the vehicle should then be

determined separately to be sure that the

load is properly distributed over the front and

rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that

the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has

been exceeded but the total load is within the

specified GVWR. If so, weight must be

shifted from front to rear or rear to front as

appropriate until the specified weight limita-

tions are met. Store the heavier items down

low and be sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely before

driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an

adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers

and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than

the GVWR or the maximum front and rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can

break, or it can change the way your ve-

hicle handles. This could cause you to lose

control. Also overloading can shorten the

life of your vehicle.

135

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)

2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

2.4L Auto/Man with Trailer Tow

Prep Package (AHC)

32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

2.4L Auto With Freedom Drive II

Off Road Package (AWL)

32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered

as part of the combined weight of occupants

and cargo, and should never exceed the

weight referenced on the Tire and Loading

Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety

Information” in “Servicing And Mainte-

nance” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING

136

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission

Flat Tow None

•

Transmission in NEUTRAL

• Key in ACC Position

NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow

Front FWD Models ONLY FWD Models ONLY

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer All OK OK

NOTE:

• When recreational towing your vehicle, al-

ways follow applicable state and provincial

laws. Contact state and provincial High-

way Safety offices for additional details.

• Vehicles equipped with manual transmis-

sions may be recreational towed (flat

towed) at any legal highway speed, for any

distance, if the manual transmission is in

NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the

ACC position.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped

with an automatic transmission. Dam-

age to the drivetrain will result. If these

vehicles require towing, make sure all

drive wheels are OFF the ground.

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle.

Internal damage to the transmission or

transfer case will occur if a dolly is used

when recreational towing.

137

138

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

. .140

BULB REPLACEMENT ........140

Replacement Bulbs ............140

Replacing Exterior Bulbs..........141

Headlamps ..................141

Fog Lamps ..................141

Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup

Lamps ....................141

License Lamps ...............141

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp .....141

FUSES....................142

Integrated Power Module (IPM)......142

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

. .144

Jack Location ................145

Spare Tire Stowage .............145

Preparations For Jacking .........146

Jacking Instructions ............146

Road Tire Installation ............151

TIRESERVICEKIT ...........152

Tire Service Kit Storage ..........152

Tire Service Kit Components And

Operation ...................152

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . .153

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . .154

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

. .157

Preparations For Jump-Start .......158

Jump-Starting Procedure .........159

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .160

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE. . . .161

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . .161

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

. .163

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM(EARS).............164

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

. .164

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

139

HAZARD WARNING

FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located

on the instrument panel below the climate

controls.

Push the switch to turn on

the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch

is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will

flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of

an emergency. Push the switch a second time

to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it

should not be used when the vehicle is in

motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled

and it is creating a safety hazard for other

motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek

assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will

continue to operate even though the ignition

is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use, the Hazard Warning

flashers may wear down your battery.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge

base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved

and should not be used for replacement

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Front Header Lamp T578

Center Dome Lamp T578

Rear Cargo Lamp/Flashlight 8–A35LF

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Low Beam/High Beam Headlamp H13

Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp 3757KA

Front Fog Lamp PSX24W

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED Assembly (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

140

Bulb Number

Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamp 3157

Backup Lamp W16W (921)

License Lamp W5W

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

Headlamps

1. Raise the hood and locate the connector

behind the headlamp.

2. Reach into engine compartment and pull

red lock out at connector.

3. Remove the green connector from the

back of the bulb by pulling straight back.

4. Twist the bulb to the left.

5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.

NOTE:

These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to

touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils

from your fingers could cause excessive heat

buildup which reduces bulb life.

Fog Lamps

1. Access lamp through the lower fascia

cutout.

2. Remove electrical connector from bulb.

3. Remove bulb from housing.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-

gers. Oil contamination will severely

shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in

contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail-

lamp housing.

3. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to dis-

engage the light from the aperture panel.

4. Twist and remove socket from the light.

5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.

License Lamps

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against

the side of the snap tab to remove the

lamp from the liftgate.

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn

counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb from the socket.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

This light is an LED assembly. See your au-

thorized dealer for replacement.

141

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use

an appropriate replacement fuse with

the same amp rating as the original fuse.

Never replace a fuse with another fuse of

higher amp rating. Never replace a

blown fuse with metal wires or any other

material. Failure to use proper fuses may

result in serious personal injury, fire

and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that

the ignition is off and that all the other

services are switched off and/or disen-

gaged.

WARNING!

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact

an authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety

systems (air bag system, braking sys-

tem), power unit systems (engine sys-

tem, transmission system) or steering

system blows, contact an authorized

dealer.

Integrated Power Module (IPM)

The Integrated Power Module is located in

the engine compartment near the air cleaner

assembly. This center contains cartridge

fuses and mini-fuses. A label that identifies

each component may be printed on the in-

side of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

further information.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

1 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow – If Equipped

2 – 15 Amp Lt Blue AWD/4WD Control Module – If Equipped

3 – 10 Amp Red Rear Center Brake Light Switch

4 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch/Clock Spring

5 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Battery Feed For Power Tech

Integrated Power Module

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

142

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

6 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror/Steering Control Satellite Radio/Hands-

Free Phone

7 – 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw

8 – 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw

9 40 Amp Green – Power Seats

10 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Locks/Interior Lighting

11 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet

12 – 20 Amp Yellow 115V AC Inverter – If Equipped

13 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter

14 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Cluster

15 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan

16 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Dome Lamp/Sunroof/Rear Wiper Motor

17 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module

18 40 Amp Green – Auto Shutdown Relay

19 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio Amplifiers

20 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Radio

21 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped

22 – 10 Amp Red Heating, AC/Compass

23 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay

24 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Sunroof – If Equipped

25 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror – If Equipped

26 – 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay

27 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module

143

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

28 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module/Occupant Classification Mod-

ule

29 – – Hot Vehicle (No Fuse Required)

30 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seat – If Equipped

31 – 10 Amp Red Headlamp Washer – If Equipped

32 30 Amp Pink – Auto Shutdown Relay

33 – 10 Amp Red J1962 Conn/Powertrain Control Module

34 30 Amp Pink – Antilock BrakeValve

35 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brake Pump

36 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp/Washer Control/Smart Glass – If Equipped

37 – 25 Amp Clear Diesel Heater and H2/MOD power top

CAUTION!

• When installing the IPM cover, it is im-

portant to ensure the cover is properly

positioned and fully latched. Failure to

do so may allow water to get into the

IPM, and possibly result in an electrical

system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-

tant to use only a fuse having the correct

amperage rating. The use of a fuse with

a rating other than indicated may result

CAUTION!

in a dangerous electrical system over-

load. If a properly rated fuse continues

to blow, it indicates a problem in the

circuit that must be corrected.

JACKING AND TIRE

CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the

side of the vehicle close to moving traf-

fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid

the danger of being hit when operating

the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan-

gerous. The vehicle could slip off the

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

144

WARNING!

jack and fall on you. You could be

crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you

need to get under a raised vehicle, take

it to a service center where it can be

raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the

vehicle is on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool

for changing tires only. The jack should

not be used to lift the vehicle for service

purposes. The vehicle should be jacked

on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

Jack Location

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under

the load floor in the cargo area.

Spare Tire Stowage

The compact spare tire is stowed under the

rear load floor in the cargo area.

Spare Tire Removal

Lift up the load floor cover and remove the

hold down.

Spare/Jack/Tools

1 — Spare Tire

2 — Jack And Tools

Spare Tire Location

145

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface,

avoiding ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side

of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull

far enough off the road to avoid the danger

of being hit when operating the jack or

changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector in PARK (auto-

matic transmission) or REVERSE (manual

transmission).

5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel

diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-

tion. For example, if changing the right

front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

while the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warn-

ings to help prevent personal injury or

damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as

far from the edge of the roadway as

possible before raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an

automatic transmission in PARK; a

manual transmission in REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the

vehicle on a jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when

it is on a jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is

on a jack. If you need to get under a

raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indi-

cated and for lifting this vehicle during a

tire change.

Wheel Blocked

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

146

WARNING!

• If working on or near a roadway, be

extremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-

flated, are securely stowed, spares must

be stowed with the valve stem facing the

ground.

NOTE:

Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-

nance” in the Owner’s Manual at

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for fur-

ther information about the spare tire, it's use,

and operation.

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench

from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn

the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug

wrench and remove the wrench from the

jack assembly.

NOTE:

The jack handle attaches to the side of the

jack with two attachment points. When

the jack is partially expanded, the tension

between the two attachment points holds

the jack handle in place.

2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts

by turning them to the left one turn while

the wheel is still on the ground.

NOTE:

There are front and rear jacking locations

on each side of the body. The front loca-

tions are outlined by two triangular cut-

outs on one of the flanges in the sill flange

assembly. The rear location is the same

but with two rectangular cutouts. For ve-

hicles equipped with plastic trim, the

plastic has been cut away to expose the

jacking locations in the body.

Warning Label

147

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by

jacking on locations other than those indi-

cated in the Jacking Instructions for this

vehicle.

Jacking Locations

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

148

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure

the jack is securely engaged.

3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the

jack can be placed under the jacking

location. Once the jack is positioned, turn

the jack screw to the right until the jack

head is properly engaged with the lift area

closest to the wheel to be changed.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary

can make the vehicle less stable. It could

slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.

Raise the vehicle only enough to remove

the tire.

4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle

by turning the jack screw to the right.

Raise the vehicle only until the tire just

clears the surface and enough clearance

is obtained to install the spare tire. Mini-

mum tire lift provides maximum stability.

Front Jack Engaged Rear Jack Engaged

149

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel

and wheel covers, where applicable, off

the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel

nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts

toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts

fully until the vehicle has been lowered.

Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury.

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury, handle

the wheel covers with care to avoid contact

with any sharp edges.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the

valve stem facing outward. The vehicle

could be damaged if the spare tire is

mounted incorrectly.

NOTE:

The wheel cover is held on the wheel by

the wheel nuts. When reinstalling the

original wheel, properly align the wheel

cover to the valve stem, place the wheel

cover onto the wheel, then install the

wheel nuts.

6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack

screw to the left.

7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down

on the wrench while at the end of the

handle for increased leverage. Tighten the

lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut

has been tightened twice. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in “Technical

Specifications” for the correct lug nut

torque. If you doubt that you have tight-

ened the nuts correctly, have them

checked with a torque wrench by your

authorized dealer or service station.

Installing Spare

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

150

8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the

jack until it is free. Release the parking

brake. Reassemble the lug wrench to the

jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire

area. Secure the assembly using the

means provided.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

jack parts and the spare tire in the places

provided.

9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo

area, have the tire repaired or replaced as

soon as possible.

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could injure the occupants in the

vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-

paired or replaced immediately.

10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as

possible. Correct the tire pressure as

required.

Road Tire Installation

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover

with the valve stem on the wheel. Install

the cover by hand. Do not use a hammer or

excessive force to install the cover.

3. Install the five wheel lug nuts with the

cone shaped end of the nut toward the

wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully

until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure

to follow this warning may result in serious

injury.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning

the jack handle counterclockwise.

5. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down

on the wrench while at the end of the

handle for increased leverage. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in “Technical

Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.

6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut

torque with a torque wrench to ensure that

all lug nuts are properly seated against the

wheel.

Wheel Cover Installation

1 — Valve Stem

2 — Valve Notch

3 — Wheel Lug Nut

4 — Wheel Cover

5 — Mounting Stud

151

Vehicles Without Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the

cone shaped end of the nut toward the

wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts

until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure

to follow this warning may result in serious

injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning

the jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down

on the wrench while at the end of the

handle for increased leverage. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in “Technical

Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut

torque with a torque wrench to ensure that

all lug nuts are properly seated against the

wheel.

TIRE SERVICE KIT

Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the

tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.

Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should

not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit

can be used in outside temperatures down to

approximately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,

allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100

miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of

55 mph (90 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located under the load

floor in the cargo area.

Tire Service Kit Components And

Operation

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle

2 — Deflation Button

3 — Pressure Gauge

4 — Power Button

5 — Mode Select Knob

6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom

side of the Tire Service Kit)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

152

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the

following symbols to indicate the air or seal-

ant mode.

•

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to

this position for air pump operation only. Use

the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting

this mode.

•

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to

this position to inject the Tire Service Kit

Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Seal-

ant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this

mode.

•

Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once

to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and

release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off

the Tire Service Kit.

•

Using The Deflation Button

Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the

air pressure in the tire if it becomes over -

inflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle

(1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the

expiration date (printed at the lower right

hand corner on the bottle label) to assure

optimum operation of the system. Refer to

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” sec-

tion (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-

ment”.

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose

(6) are a one tire application use and need

to be replaced after each use. Always re-

place these components immediately at

your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a

liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth

will remove the material from the vehicle

or tire and wheel components. Once the

sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off

and properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the

valve stem on the wheel is free of debris

before connecting the Tire Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump

to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes

with two needles, located in the Accessory

Storage Compartment (on the bottom of

the air pump) for inflating sport balls,

rafts, or similar inflatable items. However,

use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make

sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air

Mode when inflating such items to avoid

injecting sealant into them. The Tire Ser-

vice Kit Sealant is only intended to seal

punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) di-

ameter in the tread of your tire.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by

the hoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side

of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid the danger

of being hit when using the Tire Service

Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the

vehicle under the following circum-

stances:

153

WARNING!

• If the puncture in the tire tread is

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or

larger.

• If the tire has any sidewall damage.

• If the tire has any damage from

driving with extremely low tire pres-

sure.

• If the tire has any damage from

driving on a flat tire.

• If the wheel has any damage.

• If you are unsure of the condition of

the tire or the wheel.

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open

flames or heat sources.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in

a collision or hard stop could endanger

the occupants of the vehicle. Always

stow the Tire Service Kit in the place

provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are seri-

ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and

others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of

Tire Service Kit to come in contact with

hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit

WARNING!

sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,

or absorbed through the skin. It causes

skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.

Flush immediately with plenty of water if

there is any contact with eyes or skin.

Change clothing as soon as possible, if

there is any contact with clothing.

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution con-

tains latex. In case of an allergic reaction

or rash, consult a physician immedi-

ately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach

of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth

immediately with plenty of water and

drink plenty of water. Do not induce

vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-

ately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service

Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the

vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel

with the deflated tire) is in a position that

is near to the ground. This will allow the

Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach

the valve stem and keep the Tire Service

Kit flat on the ground. This will provide

the best positioning of the kit when inject-

ing the sealant into the deflated tire and

running the air pump. Move the vehicle as

necessary to place the valve stem in this

position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto

transmission) or in Gear (manual trans-

mission) and place the ignition in the OFF

position.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and

turn to the Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then

remove the cap from the fitting at the end

of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the

ground next to the deflated tire.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

154

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and

then screw the fitting at the end of the

Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the

plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power

outlet.

NOTE:

Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) from the tire.

The Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning on

the Tire Service Kit.

NOTE:

Manual transmission vehicles must have the

parking brake engaged and the gear selector

in NEUTRAL.

• After pushing the Power Button (4), the

sealant (white fluid) will flow from the

Sealant Bottle (1) through the Sealant

Hose (6) and into the tire.

NOTE:

Sealant may leak out through the puncture in

the tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –

10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the

Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant

Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure

the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect

the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.

Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in

the Sealant Mode position and not Air

Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn

on the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different

12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or

another vehicle, if available. Make sure

the engine is running before turning on

the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due

to previous use. Call for assistance.

NOTE:

If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode

and the pump is operating, air will dispense

from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the

Sealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until seal-

ant is no longer flowing through hose

(typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the

sealant flows through the Sealant Hose

(6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as

high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure

Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from ap-

proximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual

tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1)

is empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the

tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle

(1) is empty. Continue to operate the

pump and inflate the tire to the pressure

indicated on the tire pressure label on the

driver-side latch pillar (recommended

pressure). Check the tire pressure by look-

ing at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi

(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not

attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call

for assistance.

155

NOTE:

If the tire becomes overinflated, push the

Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure

to the recommended inflation pressure be-

fore continuing.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure

or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within

15 minutes:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the

Tire Service Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the

top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the

sticker on the instrument panel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose

(6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap

on the fitting at the end of the hose, and

place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle

storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)

“Drive Vehicle.”

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug

(8) may get hot after use, so it should be

handled carefully.

CAUTION!

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting

at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can

result in sealant contacting your skin,

clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It

can also result in sealant contacting

internal Tire Service Kit components

which may cause permanent damage to

the kit.

(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and in-

flating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles

(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution

of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire

repair. Have the tire inspected and re-

paired or replaced after using Tire Service

Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until

the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to

follow this warning can result in injuries

WARNING!

that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-

sengers, and others around you.

(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “When-

ever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before

continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and

turn to the Air Mode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug

into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in

color) and screw the fitting at the end of

hose (7) onto the valve stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading

the Pressure Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt

to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-

tance.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

156

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire

Service Kit and inflate the tire to the

pressure indicated on the tire and loading

information label on the driver-side door

opening.

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the

Deflation Button to reduce the tire pres-

sure to the recommended inflation pres-

sure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the

valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve

stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper

storage area in the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or

replaced at the earliest opportunity at an

authorized dealer or tire service center.

5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the

instrument panel after the tire has been

repaired.

6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Seal-

ant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized

dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

NOTE:

When having the tire serviced, advise the

authorized dealer or service center that the

tire has been sealed using the Tire Service

Kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in

color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release

button in the recessed area under the

sealant bottle.

3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button.

The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Re-

move the bottle and dispose of it

accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire

Service Kit housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the

housing so that the Sealant Hose (6)

aligns with the hose slot in the front of the

housing. Push the bottle into the housing.

An audible click will be heard indicating

the bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the

fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6)

and return the hose to its storage area

(located on the bottom of the air pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage

location in the vehicle.

JUMP-STARTING

PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can

be jump-started using a set of jumper cables

and a battery in another vehicle or by using a

portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting

can be dangerous if done improperly, so

please follow the procedures in this section

carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack,

follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-

tions and precautions.

157

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery

is frozen. It could rupture or explode and

cause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack

or any other booster source with a system

voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to

the battery, starter motor, alternator or

electrical system may occur.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the

front of the engine compartment below the

air intake duct. To access the battery remove

the air intake duct by turning the two finger

screws, located on the radiator support.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling

fan whenever the hood is raised. It can

start anytime the ignition switch is ON.

You can be injured by moving fan

blades.

Air Intake Duct/Finger Screws

1 — Air Intake Duct

2 — Finger Screws

Battery Terminals

1 — Negative Terminal

2 — Positive Terminal

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

158

WARNING!

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,

watch bands and bracelets that could

make an inadvertent electrical contact.

You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can

burn your skin or eyes and generate

hydrogen gas which is flammable and

explosive. Keep open flames or sparks

away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic

transmission into PARK (manual trans-

mission to NEUTRAL) and turn the igni-

tion to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-

essary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the

battery, park the vehicle within the jumper

cables reach, set the parking brake and

make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other

as this could establish a ground connec-

tion and personal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting proce-

dure could result in personal injury or

property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could

result in damage to the charging system of

the booster vehicle or the discharged ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Remove Air Intake before proceeding with

this Jump-Starting procedure.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the dis-

charged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive

(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of

the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper

cable to the negative (-) post of the

booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative

(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground

(exposed metal part of the discharged

vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery.

The resulting electrical spark could cause

the battery to explode and could result in

personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed

metal parts.

159

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has

the booster battery, let the engine idle a

few minutes, and then start the engine in

the vehicle with the discharged battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the

jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the

jumper cable from the engine ground of

the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-

tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)

post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the

jumper cable from the positive (+) post of

the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-

tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)

post of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

5. Reinstall the air intake duct.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start

your vehicle you should have the battery and

charging system inspected at your authorized

dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle

power outlets draw power from the vehi-

cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,

cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough without engine

operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-

charge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent the engine from starting.

IF YOUR ENGINE

OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can

reduce the potential for overheating by taking

the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the

transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-

crease engine idle speed.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow

down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it

off. The A/C system adds heat to the en-

gine cooling system and turning the A/C

off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control

to maximum heat, the mode control to

floor and the blower control to high. This

allows the heater core to act as a supple-

ment to the radiator and aids in removing

heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to

cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator or coolant

bottle is hot.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

160

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to

the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster

will sound a chime. When safe, pull over

and stop the vehicle with the engine at

idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait

until the pointer drops back into the nor-

mal range. If the pointer remains on the H

(red) mark for more than a minute, turn the

engine off immediately and call for ser-

vice.

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector

cannot be moved out of the PARK position,

you can use the following procedure to tem-

porarily move the gear selector:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,

remove the gear selector override access

cover (located on the right side of the gear

selector housing).

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or

ON/RUN position, but do not start the

engine.

5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the

brake pedal.

6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into

the access port, and push and hold the

override release lever forward.

7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL

position.

8. The vehicle may then be started in

NEUTRAL.

9. Reinstall the gear selector override access

cover.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or

snow, it can often be moved using a rocking

motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear the area around the front wheels.

Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE

and REVERSE (with automatic transmission)

or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with

manual transmission), while gently pressing

Gear Selector Override Access Cover

161

the accelerator. Use the least amount of ac-

celerator pedal pressure that will maintain

the rocking motion, without spinning the

wheels or racing the engine.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels

may lead to transmission overheating and

failure. Allow the engine to idle with the

transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one

minute after every five rocking-motion

cycles. This will minimize overheating and

reduce the risk of clutch or transmission

failure during prolonged efforts to free a

stuck vehicle.

NOTE:

Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Par-

tial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle.

Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”

in “Safety” in the Owner’s Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for fur-

ther details. Once the vehicle has been freed,

push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore

"ESC On" mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause damage, or even failure,

of the axle and tires. A tire could explode

and injure someone. Do not spin your

vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds

WARNING!

continuously without stopping when you

are stuck and do not let anyone near a

spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift-

ing between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and

REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster

than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the

wheels too fast may lead to transmission

overheating and failure. It can also dam-

age the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear

(no transmission shifting occurring).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

162

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing

a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing

service.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission

6-Speed Automatic

(FWD Only)

6-Speed Automatic

4WD

CVT Automatic

Transmission

Flat Tow NONE

• Transmission in

NEUTRAL

• Key in ACC or ON/

RUN position

If transmission is oper-

able:

• Transmission in

NEUTRAL

• 25 mph (40 km/h)

max speed

• 15 miles (24 km)

max distance

If transmission is oper-

able:

• Transmission in

NEUTRAL

• 25 mph (40 km/h)

max speed

• 15 miles (24 km)

max distance

NOT ALLOWED

Wheel Lift Or Dolly

Tow

Rear

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front FWD Models ONLY

OK NOT ALLOWED

FWD Models ONLY

Flatbed

ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD

Refer to” Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in the

Owner’s Manual at

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for fur-

ther information.

163

ENHANCED ACCIDENT

RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced

Accident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-

tems” in “Safety” for further information on

the Enhanced Accident Response System

(EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER

(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed

under certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-

ting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-

tems” in “Safety” for further information on

the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

164

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING ......166

Maintenance Plan ..............167

ENGINE COMPARTMENT ......170

2.0L Engine .................170

2.4L Engine .................171

Checking Oil Level .............172

Cooling System ...............172

Adding Washer Fluid ............172

Brake System ................173

Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .174

Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If

Equipped ...................175

Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If

Equipped ...................176

Air Conditioner Maintenance .......177

DEALERSERVICE ...........178

Windshield Wiper Blades .........178

RAISINGTHEVEHICLE........179

TIRES ....................179

Tire Safety Information ..........179

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .......185

Tire Chains (Traction Devices).......186

Tire Rotation Recommendations .....186

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA-

TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES ..................186

Treadwear ...................187

Traction Grades ...............187

Temperature Grades.............187

STORINGTHEVEHICLE.......188

BODYWORK ...............188

Preserving The Bodywork .........188

INTERIORS ................189

Seats And Fabric Parts ...........189

Plastic And Coated Parts..........189

Leather Parts.................190

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

165

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic

oil change indicator system. The oil change

indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled

maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil

change indicator message will illuminate.

This means that service is required for your

vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre-

quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or

cold ambient temperatures will influence

when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-

quired” message is displayed. Severe Oper-

ating Conditions can cause the change oil

message to illuminate as early as

3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.

Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-

sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

On instrument cluster display equipped ve-

hicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-

played in the cluster and a single chime will

sound, indicating that an oil change is nec-

essary.

On non-instrument cluster display equipped

vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the odom-

eter and a single chime will sound, indicating

that an oil change is necessary.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil

change indicator message after completing

the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil

change is performed by someone other than

your authorized dealer, the message can be

reset by referring to the steps described un-

der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change

intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),

twelve months or 350 hours of engine run

time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours

of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles

(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a

dusty and off road environment or is operated

predominately at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered

Severe Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look

for unusual wear or damage

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-

voir, brake master cylinder, power steering

and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior

lights

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

166

Maintenance Plan

Required Maintenance Intervals.

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” on the fol-

lowing pages for the required maintenance

intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

•

Change oil and filter.

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil

indicator system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten ter-

minals as required.

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,

hoses and park brake.

• Inspect engine cooling system protection

and hoses.

•

Inspect exhaust system.

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty

or off-road conditions.

167

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, and replace if

necessary.

XXX X X X X

Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary. Check park brake func-

tion, adjust if necessary.

XXX X X X X

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X

Replace spark plugs ** X X X X X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) whichever comes first.

Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid. X X

Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid. X X

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle

for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

(CVT only)

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. (CVT only) X

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

168

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Change the automatic transmission fluid (six-speed only) if you fre-

quently drive: on rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on

short trips, in heavy city traffic during hot weather, or if you use the

vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any

of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery

service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than

50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather,

above 90°F (32°C).

XX X

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mile-

age based only, yearly intervals do not

apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or

around a motor vehicle. Do only service

work for which you have the knowledge

WARNING!

and the right equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a com-

petent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain

your vehicle could result in a component

malfunction and effect vehicle handling

WARNING!

and performance. This could cause an

accident.

169

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2.0L Engine

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery

3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick

5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

170

2.4L Engine

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery

3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick

5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

171

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the en-

gine oil must be maintained at the correct

level. Check the oil level at regular intervals,

such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five min-

utes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.

Do not check oil level before starting the

engine after it has sat overnight. Checking

engine oil level when the engine is cold will

give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level

ground and only when the engine is hot, will

improve the accuracy of the oil level read-

ings. Maintain the oil level between the range

markings on the dipstick. The range markings

will consist of a crosshatch zone which de-

picts the MIN at the low end of the range and

MAX at the high end of the range. Adding

1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at

the low end of the indicated range will result

in the oil level at the full end of the indicator

range.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the

engine will cause oil aeration, which can

lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase

in oil temperature. This could damage

your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is

replaced and tightened after adding oil.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling

fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or

turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion. The fan is temperature controlled

and can start at any time the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

•

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to

cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection

every 12 months (before the onset of freezing

weather, where applicable). If the engine

coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear-

ance, the system should be drained, flushed,

and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If

dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a

garden hose vertically down the face of the

condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for

brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and

tightness of the connection at the bottle and

radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

Adding Washer Fluid

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment, and the fluid level

should be checked at regular intervals. Fill

the reservoir with windshield washer solvent

only (not radiator antifreeze).

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take

some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or

towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

172

will help blade performance. To prevent

freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture

that meets or exceeds the temperature range

of your climate. This rating information can

be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer

solvents are flammable. They could ignite

and burn you. Care must be exercised

when filling or working around the washer

solution.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance,

all brake system components should be in-

spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-

nance Plan” for the proper maintenance

intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure

and possibly a collision. Driving with your

foot resting or riding on the brake pedal

WARNING!

can result in abnormally high brake tem-

peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-

sible brake damage. You would not have

your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should

be checked when performing under hood ser-

vices, or immediately if the brake system

warning light is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin-

der area before removing the cap. If neces-

sary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to

the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to

fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid

level should be checked when the pads are

replaced. However, low fluid level may be

caused by a leak and a checkup may be

needed.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transmission, the brake fluid reservoir sup-

plies fluid to both the brake system and the

clutch release system. The two systems are

separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one

system will not affect the other system. The

manual transmission clutch release system

should not require fluid replacement during

the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid

reservoir is low and the brake system does not

indicate any leaks or other problems, it may

be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch

release system. See your local authorized

dealer for service.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in

“Technical Specifications” for further

information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer's recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-

cants” in “Technical Specifications” for

further information. Using the wrong

173

WARNING!

type of brake fluid can severely damage

your brake system and/or impair its per-

formance. The proper type of brake fluid

for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic mas-

ter cylinder reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign

matter or moisture, use only new brake

fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly

closed container. Keep the master cylin-

der reservoir cap secured at all times.

Brake fluid in a open container absorbs

moisture from the air resulting in a lower

boiling point. This may cause it to boil

unexpectedly during hard or prolonged

braking, resulting in sudden brake fail-

ure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can

result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-

gine parts, causing the brake fluid to

catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage

painted and vinyl surfaces, care should

be taken to avoid its contact with these

surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to

contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal

components could be damaged, causing

partial or complete brake failure. This

could result in a collision.

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect

overall clutch system performance. Im-

proper brake fluids may damage the clutch

system resulting in loss of clutch function

and the ability to shift the transmission.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturers recommended

transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lu-

bricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

further information.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill

plug. The fluid level should be between the

bottom of the fill hole and a point not more

than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of

the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the

proper level.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid

installed at the factory will give satisfactory

lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid

changes are not necessary unless lubricant

has become contaminated with water.

NOTE:

If contaminated with water, the fluid should

be changed immediately.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

174

Automatic Transmission (Six-Speed) — If

Equipped

Selection Of Lubricant (Six-Speed Transmis-

sion)

It is important to use the proper transmission

fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-

mance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s

specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-

tions” for fluid specifications. It is important

to maintain the transmission fluid at the

correct level using the recommended fluid.

No chemical flushes should be used in any

transmission; only the approved lubricant

should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the

manufacturer’s recommended fluid may

cause deterioration in transmission shift

quality and/or torque converter shudder.

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-

nical Specifications” for fluid specifica-

tions.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends

against using any special additives in the

transmission.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an

engineered product and its performance may

be impaired by supplemental additives.

Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to

the transmission. The only exception to this

policy is the use of special dyes for diagnos-

ing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission seal-

ers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your trans-

mission as the chemicals can damage your

transmission components. Such damage

is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and

does not require adjustment under normal

operating conditions. Routine fluid level

checks are not required, therefore the trans-

mission filler tube is capped and no dipstick

is provided. Your authorized dealer can check

your transmission fluid level using special

service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or

transmission malfunction, visit you autho-

rized dealer immediately to have the fluid

level checked. Operating the vehicle with an

improper fluid level can cause severe trans-

mission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit

your authorized dealer immediately. Se-

vere transmission damage may occur. Your

authorized dealer has the proper tools to

adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid

installed at the factory will provide satisfac-

tory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

However, if the vehicle is frequently driven on

rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads,

on short trips, or in heavy city traffic during

hot weather, or is used for frequent trailer

175

towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the

fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Sched-

ule. In addition, change the fluid and filter if

the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,

etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled

for any reason.

Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If

Equipped

Selection Of Lubricant (CVT)

It is important to use the proper transmission

fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-

mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's

specified transmission fluid which has the

special friction coefficient additives neces-

sary for proper steel belt traction on the drive

and driven pulleys. Refer to “Fluids And

Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

fluid specifications. It is important to main-

tain the transmission fluid at the correct level

using the recommended fluid.

No chemical flushes should be used in any

transmission; only the approved lubricant

should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the

manufacturer’s recommended fluid may

cause belt slip and result in a complete

transmission failure! Refer to “Fluids And

Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”

for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends

against using any special additives in the

transmission.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an

engineered product and its performance may

be impaired by supplemental additives.

Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to

the transmission. The only exception to this

policy is the use of special dyes for diagnos-

ing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission

sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your trans-

mission as the chemicals can damage your

transmission components. Such damage

is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and

does not require adjustment under normal

operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required,

therefore the transmission filler tube is

capped and no dipstick is provided. Your

authorized dealer can check your transmis-

sion fluid level using special service tools. If

you notice fluid leakage or transmission mal-

function, visit your authorized dealer imme-

diately to have the transmission fluid level

checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-

proper fluid level can cause severe transmis-

sion damage.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

176

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit

your authorized dealer immediately. Se-

vere transmission damage may occur. Your

authorized dealer has the proper tools to

adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the

proper maintenance intervals. In addition,

change the fluid and filter if the fluid be-

comes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if

the transmission is disassembled for any rea-

son.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air con-

ditioner should be checked and serviced by

an authorized dealer at the start of each warm

season. This service should include cleaning

of the condenser fins and a performance test.

Drive belt tension should also be checked at

this time.

WARNING!

•

Use only refrigerants and compressor lu-

bricants approved by the manufacturer for

your air conditioning system. Some unap-

proved refrigerants are flammable and

can explode, injuring you. Other unap-

proved refrigerants or lubricants can

cause the system to fail, requiring costly

repairs. Refer to Warranty Information

Book, in the owner’s information kit.

• The air conditioning system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

risk of personal injury or damage to the

system, adding refrigerant or any repair

requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced tech-

nician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air

conditioning system as the chemicals can

damage your air conditioning components.

Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a

hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by

the Environmental Protection Agency and is

an ozone-saving product. However, the

manufacturer recommends that air condi-

tioning service be performed by authorized

dealer or other service facilities using recov-

ery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the

proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the

vehicle is running, or while the ignition is

in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the

cabin air filter removed and the blower

operating, the blower can contact hands

and may propel dirt and debris into your

eyes, resulting in personal injury.

177

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air

inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform

the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove

all contents.

2. Push in on the sides of the glove compart-

ment and lower the door.

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that se-

cure the filter cover to the HVAC housing,

and remove the cover.

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it

straight out of the housing.

6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on

the filter pointing toward the floor. When

installing the filter cover, make sure the

retaining tabs fully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with an

arrow to indicate airflow direction through

the filter. Failure to properly install the

filter will result in the need to replace it

more often.

7. Rotate the glove compartment door back

into position.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified ser-

vice personnel, special tools, and equipment

to perform all service operations in an expert

manner. Service Manuals are available which

include detailed service information for your

vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-

fore attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could

result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or

around a motor vehicle. Only do service work

for which you have the knowledge and the

proper equipment. If you have any doubt

about your ability to perform a service job,

take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and

the windshield periodically with a sponge or

soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This

will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long

periods may cause deterioration of the wiper

blades. Always use washer fluid when using

the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry

windshield.

A/C Air Filter Retaining Tabs

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

178

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost

or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade

rubber out of contact with petroleum prod-

ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use.

Poor performance of blades may be present with

chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If

any of these conditions are present, clean the

wiper blades or replace as necessary.

RAISING THE VEHICLE

In the case where it is necessary to raise the

vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service

station.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of

the following information: Tire Markings, Tire

Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and

Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based

on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires

have the letter “P” molded into the side-

wall preceding the size designation.

Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on

European design standards. Tires de-

signed to this standard have the tire size

molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter "P" is absent

from this tire size designation.

Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is

based on U.S. design standards. The size

designation for LT-Metric tires is the same

as for P-Metric tires except for the letters

“LT” that are molded into the sidewall

preceding the size designation.

Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for

temporary emergency use only. Temporary

high pressure compact spare tires have the

letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall

preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT

Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum

Load

2 — Size Designa-

tion

5 — Maximum

Pressure

3 — Service De-

scription

6 — Treadwear,

Traction and Tem-

perature Grades

179

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards and it begins with the

tire diameter molded into the sidewall.

Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of

the tire; however, the date code may only be

on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will

have the full TIN, including the date code,

located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black

sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If

the TIN is not found on the outboard side,

then you will find it on the inboard side of the

tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is ap-

proved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

–03meansthe3rdweek

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufac-

tured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

180

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front

door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting

for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds

per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pres-

sure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire

placard.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,

the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

181

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is

listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear

edge of the driver's side door.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information

about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in

the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,

rear, and spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must

not exceed the load carrying capacity of the

tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the

tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to

the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in “Vehicle

Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”

section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the

front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

182

To determine the maximum loading condi-

tions of your vehicle, locate the statement

“The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/

luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-

cable) should never exceed the weight refer-

enced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg

and there will be five 68 kg passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-

340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. The following table shows ex-

amples on how to calculate total load,

cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of

your vehicle with varying seating configu-

rations and number and size of occupants.

This table is for illustration purposes only

and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

183

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

184

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.

Overloading can cause tire failure, affect

vehicle handling, and increase your stop-

ping distance. Use tires of the recom-

mended load capacity for your vehicle.

Never overload them.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-

num and chrome plated wheels, should be

cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)

soap and water to maintain their luster and to

prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the

same soap solution recommended for the

body of the vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration

caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium

chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other

road chemicals used to melt ice or control

dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge

and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not

use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can

damage the wheel’s protective coating that

helps keep them from corroding and tarnish-

ing.

NOTE:

Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain

strong acids or strong alkaline additives that

can harm the wheel surface.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes

that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline

additives or harsh brushes. These products

and automatic car washes may damage the

wheel's protective finish. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-

mended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-

ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken

in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning

chemicals and equipment to prevent damage

to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or

Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is

recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-

acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome

wheels. Do not use any products on Dark

Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They

will permanently damage this finish and such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a

bristle brush, metal polishes or oven

cleaner. These products may damage the

wheel's protective finish. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-

mended.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle

for an extended period after cleaning the

wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle

for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the

vehicle and applying the brakes when stop-

ping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corro-

sion.

185

Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor

or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT

USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polish-

ing compounds. They will permanently

damage this finish and such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER

WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular

basis; this is all that is required to main-

tain this finish.

Tire Chains (Traction Devices)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or trac-

tion devices are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire

chains are used.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle

operate at different loads and perform differ-

ent steering, driving, and braking functions.

For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rota-

tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are

especially worthwhile with aggressive tread

designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to

maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels,

and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the

proper maintenance intervals. The reasons

for any rapid or unusual wear should be

corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “for-

ward cross” shown in the following diagram.

This rotation pattern does not apply to some

directional tires that must not be reversed.

DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES

The following tire grading categories

were established by the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the

tire's manufacturer in each category is

shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

Tire Rotation

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

186

All passenger vehicle tires must con-

form to Federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative

rating, based on the wear rate of the

tire when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified government test

course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The rela-

tive performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations

in driving habits, service practices,

and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These

grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement, as measured

under controlled conditions on speci-

fied government test surfaces of as-

phalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not in-

clude acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat,

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive

temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance, which all pas-

senger vehicle tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel, than the

minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Exces-

sive speed, under-inflation, or ex-

187

WARNING!

cessive loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more

than 21 days, you may want to take steps to

preserve your battery.

• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Dis-

tribution Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-

Draw).

• Or disconnect the negative cable from the

battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it

out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks

or more, run the air conditioning system at

idle for about five minutes in the fresh air

and high blower setting. This will ensure

adequate system lubrication to minimize

the possibility of compressor damage when

the system is started again.

BODYWORK

Preserving The Bodywork

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash

your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car

Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse

the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits

have accumulated on your vehicle, use

MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover

to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as

MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film,

stains and to protect your paint finish. Take

care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and

power buffing that may diminish the gloss

or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning

materials such as steel wool or scouring

CAUTION!

powder that will scratch metal and

painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding

1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in

damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if

you drive near the ocean, hose off the

undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the

lower edges of the doors, rocker panels,

and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches

in the paint, touch them up immediately.

The cost of such repairs is considered the

responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a colli-

sion or similar cause that destroys the

paint and protective coating, have your

vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the re-

sponsibility of the owner.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

188

• If you carry special cargo such as chemi-

cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure

that such materials are well packaged and

sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,

consider mud or stone shields behind each

wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches

as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer

has touch up paint to match the color of

your vehicle.

INTERIORS

Seats And Fabric Parts

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric up-

holstery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning

purposes. Many are potentially flammable,

and if used in closed areas they may cause

respiratory harm.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with

chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This

will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also

weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove

the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry

with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or

worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-

ately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system. Seat belt assemblies must be re-

placed after a collision if they have been

damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

Plastic And Coated Parts

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl

upholstery.

CAUTION!

•

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect

repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitiz-

ers to the plastic, painted, or decorated

surfaces of the interior may cause perma-

nent damage. Wipe away immediately.

• Damage caused by these type of prod-

ucts may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this

vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When

cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to

avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap

solution may be used, but do not use high

alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If

soap is used, wipe clean with a clean

damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

189

Leather Parts

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recom-

mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved

by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.

Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive

and damage the leather upholstery and

should be removed promptly with a damp

cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily

with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean.

Care should be taken to avoid soaking your

leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do

not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, sol-

vents, detergents, or ammonia-based clean-

ers to clean your leather upholstery. Applica-

tion of a leather conditioner is not required to

maintain the original condition.

NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it

tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and

fabric dye transfer more so than darker col-

ors. The leather is designed to for easy clean-

ing, and FCA recommends MOPAR total care

leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the

leather seats as needed.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based

and/or Ketone based cleaning products to

clean leather seats, as damage to the seat

may result.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

190

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER ..................192

BRAKESYSTEM.............192

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS ............193

Torque Specifications ...........193

FUELREQUIREMENTS........193

2.0L And 2.4L Engine ...........193

Materials Added To Fuel .........194

FLUIDCAPACITIES ..........194

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . .195

Engine ....................195

Chassis ....................196

MOPARACCESSORIES........196

Authentic Accessories By Mopar .....196

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

191

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is

found on the left front corner of the instru-

ment panel, visible through the windshield.

This number also is stamped into the right

front body, on the right front seat crossmem-

ber under the carpet and the vehicle registra-

tion and title.

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted

brakes as standard equipment. In the event

power assist is lost for any reason (for ex-

ample, repeated brake applications with the

engine off), the brakes will still function.

However, the effort required to brake the

vehicle will be much greater than that re-

quired with the power system operating.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure

and possibly a collision. Driving with your

foot resting or riding on the brake pedal

can result in abnormally high brake tem-

peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-

sible brake damage. You would not have

your full braking capacity in an emergency.

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose

normal capability, the remaining system will

still function with some loss of overall braking

effectiveness. This will be evident by in-

creased pedal travel during application and

greater pedal force required to slow or stop.

In addition, if the malfunction is caused by

an internal leak, as the brake fluid in the

master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning

Light” will light.

Vehicle Identification Number

Right Front Body VIN Location

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

192

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning

Light” on is dangerous. A significant de-

crease in braking performance or vehicle

stability during braking may occur. It will

take you longer to stop the vehicle or will

make your vehicle harder to control. You

could have a collision. Have the vehicle

checked immediately.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to

ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to

the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-

moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug

nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly

calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)

M12 x

1.5

19 mm

**Use only your authorized dealer recom-

mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove

any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion

or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern

until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/

bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/

bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully

until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure

to follow this warning may result in per-

sonal injury.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.0L And 2.4L Engine

These engines are designed

to meet all emissions regu-

lations and provide opti-

mum fuel economy and

performance when using

high quality unleaded

“Regular” gasoline having

a posted octane number of 87 as specified by

Torque Patterns

193

the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane

“Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will

not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline

in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane

number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound

from the engine is not a cause for concern.

However, if the engine is heard making a

heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-

ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure

and may void or not be covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-

tions. If you experience these symptoms, try

another brand of gasoline before considering

service for the vehicle.

Materials Added To Fuel

Designated TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline

contains a higher level

of detergents to fur-

ther aide in minimiz-

ing engine and fuel

system deposits. When

available, the usage of

Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.

Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning

agents should be avoided. Many of these

materials intended for gum and varnish re-

moval may contain active solvents or similar

ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas-

ket and diaphragm materials.

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

13.6 Gallons 51 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters

Cooling System *

2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile For-

mula or equivalent)

7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

194

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE

grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)

other than specified Organic Additive

Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-

freeze), may result in engine damage

and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant is different and should not

be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive

Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-

CAUTION!

freeze) or any “globally compatible”

coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into

the cooling system in an emergency, the

cooling system will need to be drained,

flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool-

ant (conforming to MS.90032), by an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do

not use additional rust inhibitors or an-

CAUTION!

tirust products, as they may not be com-

patible with the radiator engine coolant

and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for

use with propylene glycol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene

glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)

is not recommended.

195

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission (CVT) — If

Equipped

Use only MOPAR CVTF+4 Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid

may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

Automatic Transmission (Six-

Speed) — If Equipped

Use only MOPAR SP-IV M Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect

the function or performance of your transmission.

Manual Transmission — If

Equipped

We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not

available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MOPAR ACCESSORIES

Authentic Accessories By Mopar

In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain

far more than expressive style, premium pro-

tection, or extreme entertainment, you also

benefit from enhancing your vehicle with

accessories that have been thoroughly tested

and factory-approved.

The following highlights just some of the

many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar

featuring a fit, finish, and functionality spe-

cifically for your Jeep Patriot.

For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-

ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or

online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and

mopar.ca for Canadian residents.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

196

EXTERIOR:

• Camping Tent • Sunroof Air Deflector • Front Air Deflector

• Hitch Receiver • Rear Air Deflectors • Molded Splash Guards

• Fog Lights • Vehicle Cover • 16” Steel Wheels

• 17” Steel Wheels • 18” Black/Silver Wheels • Trailer Towing Accessories

• Tow Hooks • Valve Stem Caps • License Plate Frames

• Wheel Locks

INTERIOR:

• Carpet Floor Mats • Door Sill Guards • Bright Pedal Kit

• Slush Mats • Collapsible Tote • Cargo Mat

• Katzkin Leather Interiors • Cargo Tray • Cargo Nets

• Roadside Safety Kit • Shift Knob • Security Cover

ELECTRONICS:

• Kicker Speakers • Ambient Light Kit • Remote Start

• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System (EVTS)

CARRIERS:

• Canoe Carrier • Bike Carriers • Water Sports Carrier

• Roof Rack • Roof Basket • Roof Cargo Box

• Ski and Snowboard Carriers • Hitch-mounted Bike Carriers

NOTE:

All parts are subject to availability.

197

198

MULTIMEDIA

RADIO130................200

Clock Setting.................201

Equalizer, Balance And Fade .......201

Radio Operation ...............201

CD/DISC Operation .............201

Audio Jack Operation ............201

RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE

RADIO ...................202

Clock Setting.................203

Equalizer, Balance And Fade .......203

Radio Operation ...............203

SiriusXM Satellite Radio ..........204

CD/DISC Operation .............204

Audio Jack Operation ............205

UCONNECT 430/430N .......206

Clock Setting.................207

Menu .....................207

Equalizer, Balance And Fade .......207

Radio Operation ...............208

CD/DVD Disc Operation ..........209

Audio Jack Operation ............209

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation . . . .210

Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio . . . .212

Garmin Navigation .............212

Main Navigation Menu ...........213

Following Your Route ............214

SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO/

TRAVELLINK...............214

SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect 430N

Only)......................218

CYBERSECURITY............218

TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL

INFORMATION..............219

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......219

Reception Conditions ............220

Care And Maintenance ...........220

Anti-theft Protection ............220

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF

EQUIPPED.................221

BLUETOOTH STREAMING

AUDIO ...................221

UCONNECT PHONE ..........222

Phone Pairing ................222

Phonebook ..................223

Making A Phone Call ............224

Receiving A Call — Accept (And End). .224

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During

Call ......................224

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And

Vehicle ....................224

Changing The Volume ...........224

UCONNECT VOICE COMMAND. .225

Voice Command Operation.........225

Voice Text Reply ..............228

MULTIMEDIA

199

RADIO 130

Uconnect 130

1 — CD Eject Button

2 — SEEK Down Button

3 — SEEK Up Button

4 — AM/FM Button

5 — DISC Mode Button

6 — AUX Mode Button

7 — Rewind Button

8 — Fast Forward Button

9 — Set Clock Button

10 — Audio Settings/Rotate To Tune

11 — Radio Sales Code

12 — Audio Jack

13 — Set Preset/CD Random Play

14 — Station Presets Buttons

15 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume

MULTIMEDIA

200

NOTE:

• Your radio has many features that add to

the comfort and convenience for you and

your passengers.

•

Some of these radio features should not be

used when driving because they take your

eyes from the road or your attention from

driving.

Clock Setting

1. Push and hold the TIME button until the

hours blink.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

set the hours.

3. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob un-

til the minutes begin to blink.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

set the minutes.

5. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

save the changes.

6. Push any button/knob or wait five seconds

to exit.

Equalizer, Balance And Fade

1. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and

“BASS” will display.

2. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

select the desired setting.

Continue pushing the TUNE/SCROLL con-

trol knob to display and set “MID RANGE,”

“TREBLE,” “BALANCE” and “FADE.”

Radio Operation

Seek Up/Down Buttons

• Push the seek up or down button to seek

through radio stations in AM or FM bands.

• Hold either button to bypass stations with-

out stopping.

Store Radio Presets Manually

• Tune to the desired station.

•

Push the SET/RND or SET (depending on the

radio) button once and SET 1 will show in the

display. Then select a preset button (1–6).

• A second station may be added to each

push button. Push the SET/RND or SET

(depending on the radio) button twice and

SET 2 will show in the display. Then select

a preset button (1–6).

CD/DISC Operation

Seek Up/Down Buttons

• Push to seek through CD tracks.

• Hold either button to bypass tracks with-

out stopping.

SET/RND Or RND (Depending On Radio) Button

(Random Play)

• Push this button while the CD is playing to

activate Random Play.

• This feature plays the selections on the CD

in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

Audio Jack Operation

The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to

connect a portable audio device, such as an

MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound

system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm

stereo audio patch cable.

Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to

auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is connected,

allowing the music from your portable device to

play through the vehicle's speakers.

The functions of the portable device are con-

trolled using the device buttons, not the but-

tons on the radio. However, the volume may

be controlled using the radio or portable de-

vice.

201

RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

Uconnect 130 With SiriusXM Satellite Radio

1 — CD Eject Button

2 — SEEK Down Button

3 — SEEK Up Button

4 — Voice Command Button

5 — Uconnect Phone Button

6 — Station Info Button

7 — Rewind Button

8 — Fast Forward Button

9 — Set Clock Button

10 — Audio Settings/Rotate To Tune

11 — Radio Sales Code

12 — Audio Jack

13 — Set Preset/CD Random Play

14 — Station Preset Buttons

15 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume

16 — AM/FM Mode Button

17 — List Folders On A CD

18 — Satellite Radio Button

19 — Music Type Button

20 — DISC Mode Button

21 — Set Up Function Button

MULTIMEDIA

202

NOTE:

• Your radio may not be equipped with the

Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect

Phone features. To determine if your radio

has these features, push the Voice Com-

mand button on the radio. You will hear a

voice prompt if you have the feature, or see

a message on the radio stating “Uconnect

Phone not available” if you do not.

• Your radio has many features that add to

the comfort and convenience of you and

your passengers. Some of these radio fea-

tures should not be used when driving

because they take your eyes from the road

or your attention from driving.

Clock Setting

1. Push and hold the TIME button until the

hours blink.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

set the hours.

3. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob un-

til the minutes begin to blink.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

set the minutes.

5. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

save the changes.

6. Push any button/knob or wait five seconds

to exit.

Equalizer, Balance And Fade

1. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and

“BASS” will display.

2. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

select the desired setting.

3. Continue pushing the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to display and set “MID

RANGE,” “TREBLE,” “BALANCE” and

“FADE.”

Radio Operation

Seek Up/Down Buttons

• Push the seek up or down button to seek

through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT

bands.

• Hold either button to bypass stations with-

out stopping.

Store Radio Presets Manually

• Tune to the desired station.

• Push the SET/RND or SET (depending on

the radio) button once and SET 1 will show

in the display. Then select a preset button

(1–6).

• A second station may be added to each

push button. Push the SET/RND or SET

(depending on the radio) button twice and

SET 2 will show in the display. Then select

a preset button (1–6).

Music Type

NOTE:

The Music Type function only operates when

in FM mode.

• Push the MUSIC TYPE button to activate

this mode. Push the MUSIC TYPE button

again or turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to select the desired music type

(Adult Hits, Country, Jazz, Oldies, Rock,

etc.).

• When a music type is chosen and the

Music type is displayed, push either SEEK

button and the radio will only search for

stations with the selected music type.

203

SETUP Button

• Pushing the SETUP button allows you to

select between items that are available in

that particular mode.

• Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

scroll through the entries. Push the

AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry

and make changes.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold

separately after the 12-month trial included

with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide

to continue your service at the end of your trial

subscription, the plan you choose will automati-

cally renew and bill at then-current rates until

you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 to can-

cel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for

complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All

fees and programming subject to change. Our

satellite service is available only to those at

least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA

and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also

available in PR (with coverage limitations).

Our Internet radio service is available

throughout our satellite service area and in

Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are

trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio gives you over

130 channels, including 100% commercial-

free music from nearly every genre, plus all

your favorite sports, news, talk and entertain-

ment channels – all with crystal clear, coast-

to-coast coverage, all in one place and all at

your fingertips.

• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push

the SAT button on the faceplate.

CD/DISC Operation

Seek Up/Down Buttons

• Push to seek through CD tracks.

• Hold either button to bypass tracks with-

out stopping.

SET/RND or RND (Depending On Radio) Button

(Random Play)

• Push this button while the CD is playing to

activate random play.

• This feature plays the selections on the CD

in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

LIST Button

• Push the LIST button to bring up a list of

all folders on the CD. Scroll up or down the

list by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob.

• To select a folder from the list, push the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the radio

will begin playing the files contained in

that folder.

MULTIMEDIA

204

Audio Jack Operation

The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to

connect a portable audio device, such as an

MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound

system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm

stereo audio patch cable.

Pushing the AUX button will change the

mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is

connected, allowing the music from your por-

table device to play through the vehicle's

speakers.

The functions of the portable device are con-

trolled using the device buttons, not the but-

tons on the radio. However, the volume may

be controlled using the radio or portable de-

vice.

205

UCONNECT 430/430N

Uconnect 430/430N

1 — Voice Command Button

2 — Open/Close Display

3 — MENU Button

4 — AUDIO Settings Button

5 — Internal Hard Drive Button

6 — USB Port

7 — Audio Jack

8 — Radio Sales Code

9 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume

10 — Select MEDIA Mode Button

11 — RADIO Mode Button

12 — Uconnect Phone Button

MULTIMEDIA

206

NOTE:

•

Your radio may not be equipped with the

Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect

Phone features. To determine if your radio

has these features, push the Voice Command

button on the radio. You will hear a voice

prompt if you have the feature, or see a

message on the radio stating “Uconnect

Phone not available” if you do not.

• Your radio has many features that add to

the comfort and convenience of you and

your passengers. Some of these radio fea-

tures should not be used when driving

because they take your eyes from the road

or your attention from driving.

Clock Setting

1. Turn the radio on, then press the screen

where the time is displayed.

2. Press the “User Clock” button on the

touchscreen or the time display (Naviga-

tion radio only).

3. To adjust the hours, press either the “Hour

Forward” or “Hour Backward” button on

the touchscreen.

4. To adjust the minutes, press either the

“Minute Forward” or “Minute Backward”

button on the touchscreen.

5. To save the new time setting, press the

screen where the word “Save” is

displayed.

• Push the MENU button on the faceplate to

access the System Setup menu and the

My Files menu.

• Push the MENU button on the faceplate in

an active mode (SAT, CD, AUX, etc.) to

change mode specific settings.

Equalizer, Balance And Fade

Audio Control Menu

• Push the AUDIO button on the faceplate

on the right side of the radio.

• Use either the “arrow” buttons on the

touchscreen or the sliders to adjust BASS,

MID, and/or TREBLE.

• Press the “BAL/FADE” button on the

touchscreen and use either the “arrow”

buttons on the touchscreen or the cross-

hair to change Balance and Fade. The

“Center” button on the touchscreen resets

the settings.

Display Settings

• Push the MENU button on the faceplate

and press the “Display Settings” button on

the touchscreen to access the Display Set-

tings menu.

Audio Control Menu

Display Settings

207

• Select the “Daytime Colors” button on the

touchscreen to switch to manual daytime

mode and to adjust the brightness of the

display using daytime colors.

• Select the “Nighttime Colors” button on

the touchscreen to switch to manual

nighttime mode and to adjust the bright-

ness of the display using nighttime colors.

• Select the “Auto Color Mode” button on

the touchscreen to switch to automatic

daytime/nighttime mode and to control

the brightness of the display using the

dimmer switch of the vehicle.

• Press the “Exit” button on the touch-

screen to save your settings.

Radio Operation

• To access Radio Mode, push the RADIO

button on the left side of the faceplate,

then press the “AM,” “FM” or “SAT” but-

ton on the touchscreen to select the band.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Press the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN”

buttons on the touchscreen to seek

through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT

bands. Hold either seek button to bypass

stations without stopping.

Store Radio Presets Manually

• Select the radio band by pressing either

the “AM,” “FM,” or “SAT” button on the

touchscreen.

• Find the station to store by either pressing

the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN” buttons

on the touchscreen, pressing the “Scan”

button on the touchscreen, or by using the

“Direct Tune” button on the touchscreen.

•

Once the desired station is found, press and

hold one of the “PRESETS” buttons on the

touchscreen in the list to the right, until the

preset key flashes and the station text on the

button on the touchscreen changes.

NOTE:

If the Presets are not visible on the right side

of the screen, press the “PRESETS” button

on the touchscreen.

Radio Operation

1 — Radio Tuner Tabs

2 — Individual Presets

3 — Search/Browse

4 — Radio Station/Track Info

5 — Sort Presets

6 — Station Scan

7 — Seek Down

8 — Direct Tune

9 — Seek Up

MULTIMEDIA

208

CD/DVD Disc Operation

• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate

to display the media source tabs at the top

of the screen. Select the source by press-

ing the “HDD,” “DISC” or “AUX” media

source button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

Your Touchscreen Radio will usually auto-

matically switch to the appropriate mode

when something is first connected or inserted

into the system.

Insert A CD/DVD Disc

• To insert a disc, push the LOAD button on

the faceplate.

• With the printed side upwards, insert the

disc into the disc slot of the radio. The

radio pulls the disc in automatically and

closes the flip screen. The radio selects

the appropriate mode after the disc is

recognized, and starts playing the first

track. The display shows “Reading...” dur-

ing this process.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Push the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN but-

tons on the faceplate to seek through

tracks in Disc Mode. Holding the SEEK UP

button on the touchscreen will fast forward

through the track until the beginning of

the track is reached; if still held it will

fast-forward through the next sequential

track(s) (if random play mode is not active)

until released. Holding the SEEK DOWN

button on the touchscreen will fast-reverse

through the track until the beginning of

the track is reached; if still held it will

fast-reverse through the next sequential

track(s) (if random play mode is not active)

until released.

Audio Jack Operation

The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to

connect a portable audio device, such as an

MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound

system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm

stereo audio patch cable.

• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate

then the “AUX” button on the touchscreen

to change the mode to auxiliary device if

the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the

music from your portable device to play

through the vehicle's speakers.

CD/DVD Disc Operation

1 — Media Source Tabs

2 — Folder/Track

3 — Open Folder

4 — Track Information

5 — Sort Tracks

6 — Track Scan

7 — Seek Down

8 — Play/Pause

9 — Seek Up

209

NOTE:

The functions of the portable device are con-

trolled using the device itself, not the buttons

on the radio. However, the volume may be

controlled using the radio or portable device.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation

• The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) mode gives you

access to the audio files on the internal

hard disk drive. It functions similar to a CD

player, with the exception that the internal

HDD can hold more tracks.

• It is also possible to import display pic-

tures to the internal hard disk drive. The

pictures can be displayed on the right half

of the radio screen.

• Before using the HDD mode, you will need

to copy songs and pictures to the internal

hard drive. Songs and pictures can be

added to the hard drive by using a CD or

USB device (e.g. thumb drive or memory

stick).

NOTE:

• HDD supports only .jpg/JPEG formats for

photos.

• WMA/MP3 Files and selective songs from

a CD can also be added to the HDD. See

the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment for more information.

Copying Music From CD

• Push the LOAD button on the faceplate.

• Insert a disc, then push the MY FILES

button on the faceplate. Select the “MY

MUSIC” button on the touchscreen.

• Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” but-

ton on the touchscreen, then press the

“Disc” button on the touchscreen in the

next screen to start the process.

NOTE:

• You might need to select the folder or title

depending on the CD, then push “DONE”

to start the copy process.

• The copy progress is shown in the lower

left corner of the screen.

Copying Music From USB

• The USB port on the radio face plate

allows you to copy files to your hard drive.

To access, lift up on the cover.

• Insert a USB device (e.g. thumb drive or

memory stick), then select the “MY MU-

SIC” button on the touchscreen.

• Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” but-

ton on the touchscreen, then press the

“Front USB” button on the touchscreen in

the next screen.

Copying Music From CD

MULTIMEDIA

210

• Select the folders or titles you would like

to copy, then press the “SAVE” button on

the touchscreen to start the copy process.

• To copy all of the titles, press the “ALL”

button on the touchscreen then press the

“SAVE” button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

The copy progress is shown in the lower left

corner of the screen.

Copying Pictures To The HDD

• Insert either a CD or a USB device contain-

ing your pictures in JPEG format.

• Push the MY FILES button on the face-

plate.

• Press the “My Pictures” button on the

touchscreen to get an overview of the cur-

rently stored images, then press the “Add”

button on the touchscreen.

• Press the “Disc” or “USB” button on the

touchscreen, then select the folders or

pictures you wish to copy to the HDD. Use

the “PAGE” buttons on the touchscreen to

page through the list of pictures.

•

Press the desired pictures or press the “All”

button on the touchscreen for all pictures.

Confirm your selections by pressing the

“SAVE” button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

The copy progress is shown in the lower left

corner of the screen.

Display A Picture On The Radio Screen

• Once the import is complete, the pictures

will then be available in the “MY PIC-

TURES” screen.

• Push the MY FILES button on the face-

plate, then press the “My Pictures” button

on the touchscreen. Press the desired pic-

ture, press the “Set as Picture View” but-

ton on the touchscreen and then press the

“Exit” button on the touchscreen. Lastly

push the MENU button on the faceplate

and press the “Picture View” button on the

touchscreen to display the chosen picture

on the radio screen.

NOTE:

• A check mark in the My Pictures screen

indicates the currently used picture.

• You can also delete pictures by pressing

the “Delete” button on the touchscreen.

Playing Music From The HDD

• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate

to display the media source tabs at the top

of the screen. Press the “HDD” button on

the touchscreen. Press the desired track

button on the touchscreen to play or press

Copying Music From USB

Copying Pictures To The HDD

211

the “SEARCH/BROWSE” button on the

touchscreen to search by artist, by album,

by song, by genre, from a folder, or from

Favorites.

Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio

• If necessary, use a dry micro fiber lens

cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning

solution such as isopropyl alcohol or an

isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio

of 50:50. Always follow the solvent manu-

facturer's precautions and directions.

CAUTION!

Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemi-

cals directly on the screen. Use a clean

and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to

clean the touchscreen.

Garmin Navigation

• Uconnect 430N integrates Garmin’s

consumer-friendly navigation into your ve-

hicle. Garmin Navigation includes a data-

base with over six million points of inter-

est.

• Press the “NAV” button in the upper right

corner of the touchscreen to access the

Navigation system.

Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume

1. Program a destination.

2. While traveling on your route, press the

upper left area of the map screen where

your next turn is displayed.

3. The navigation system will then repeat the

distance to your next turn.

4. While the navigation system is speaking,

use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to

adjust the volume to a comfortable level.

Please note the volume setting for Navi-

gation Voice Prompt is different than the

audio system.

Playing Music From The HDD

Browsing Music From The HDD

Garmin Navigation

MULTIMEDIA

212

NOTE:

For your own safety and the safety of others, it

is not possible to use certain features while

the vehicle is in motion.

Main Navigation Menu

Finding Points Of Interest

• From the main Navigation menu, press the

“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,

then press the “Points of Interest” button

on the touchscreen.

• Select a category, then a subcategory, if

necessary.

• Select your destination and press the “Go”

button on the touchscreen.

Finding A Place By Spelling The Name

• From the main navigation menu, press the

“Where To?” button on the touchscreen.

Next, press the “Points of Interest” button

on the touchscreen then press the “Spell

Name” button on the touchscreen.

• Enter the name of your destination.

• Press the “Done” button on the touch-

screen.

• Select your destination and press the “Go”

button on the touchscreen.

Entering A Destination Address

• From the main navigation menu, press the

“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,

then press the “Address” button on the

touchscreen.

• Follow the on-screen prompts to enter the

address, then press the “Go” button on

the touchscreen.

Setting Your Home Location

• From the main navigation menu, press the

"Tools" icon. Select the "My Data" folder

icon, and then select "Set Home Loca-

tion."

• You may enter your address directly, use

your current location as your home ad-

dress, or choose from recently found

locations.

Edit Home Location

• From the main Navigation menu press the

“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,

then press the "Tools" icon. Next, press the

"My Data" folder.

• You may enter a new address directly, use

your current location or choose from re-

cently found locations.

Go Home

• A Home location must be saved in the

system. From the Main Navigation menu,

press the “Where To?” button on the

touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”

button on the touchscreen.

Main Navigation Menu

213

Following Your Route

Your route is marked with a magenta line on

the map. If you depart from the original route,

your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon

could appear as you travel on major road-

ways.

Adding A Via Point

To add a stop between the current location

and the end destination (Via Point), you must

be navigating a route.

• Press the “back arrow” icon multiple

times to return to the main navigation

menu.

• Press the “Where To?” button on the

touchscreen, then search for the addi-

tional stop. Select the destination you

wish to add from the given search results.

• Press the “Go” button on the touchscreen,

then press "Add as a Via Point" button on

the touchscreen and press the "Done" but-

ton on the touchscreen.

Taking A Detour

To take a detour, you must be navigating a

route.

• Press the “back arrow” icon button on the

touchscreen multiple times to return to

the main navigation menu.

• Press the “Detour” button on the

touchscreen.

NOTE:

If the route you are currently taking is the

only reasonable option, the device might not

calculate a detour.

Acquiring Satellites

The GPS Satellite strength bars indicate the

strength of your satellite reception.

• Acquiring satellite signals can take a few

minutes. When at least one of the bars is

green, your device has acquired satellite

signals.

• You may experience delays receiving sat-

ellite signals when in areas with an ob-

structed view to the sky, such as garages,

tunnels, or large cities with tall buildings.

SIRIUSXM SATELLITE

RADIO/TRAVEL LINK

SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,

sold separately after the five year trial sub-

scription included with your vehicle purchase

and is ONLY available in the United States.

Following Your Route

1 — Distance To Next Turn

2 — Current Location

3 — Zoom In

4 — Zoom Out

5 — Current Speed

6 — Drag Map For Different View

7 — Your Location On The Map

8 — Estimated Time Of Arrival

9 — Navigation Main Menu

MULTIMEDIA

214

To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the

RADIO/MEDIA or RADIO button on the face-

plate, then press the “SAT” button on the

touchscreen.

The following describes features that are

available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio

mode.

Info

• Press the “i” button on the touchscreen to

view detailed information about the cur-

rent SiriusXM Satellite channel.

SiriusXM Parental Controls

• SiriusXM offers the option to permanently

block selected channels. Call

1-888-539-7474 and request the Family

Package.

• Uconnect 430/430N: Push the MENU but-

ton on the faceplate while in SiriusXM

Satellite Radio Mode, then press the

“Channel Lock” to enable and/or disable

desired channels. The SEEK and SCAN

function will then only display channels

without Channel lock.

Search/Browse

• Press the “magnifying glass” button on

the touchscreen to search/browse the

SiriusXM channel listing by Favorites and

Categories such as Song, Artist and Chan-

nel Name. The Search/Browse also allows

you manage your Favorites.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Favorites (SAT Favor-

ites)

You can save 50 favorite songs and 50 favor-

ite artists.

• Press the “add favorite” button on the

touchscreen to add either the song or the

artist of the currently playing program to

the SAT Favorites list. The favorite star will

appear in the upper right corner, below the

SAT button on the touchscreen.

You will see a favorite star indicator in the

upper right side of the screen below the SAT

button on the touchscreen and a pop up will

alert you that a favorite song or artist is

currently playing on one of the SiriusXM sat-

ellite radio channels.

SAT Browse

Manage SAT Favorites

215

NOTE:

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement for more information.

Display SAT Favorites List

• Press the “Search/Browse” button on the

touchscreen and select “Favorites” from

the SAT Browse screen.

• Press the desired favorites button on the

touchscreen to switch the SAT tuner to the

corresponding channel.

You may use the “LIST” button on the touch-

screen to toggle between:

• Favorite Songs

• Favorite Artists

• Currently playing favorites

Replay

• While you are in SAT mode, you can replay

44 minutes of the current SiriusXM chan-

nel (when the channel is changed, this

audio buffer is erased). Push the REPLAY

button to listen to the stored audio.

• You can press the on-screen controls to

pause and rewind audio playback, press

the SCAN button to preview each of the

tracks stored in the buffer, or select a track

from the list.

• The time displayed below the bar indi-

cates how much time is present between

the current buffer play position and the

live broadcast.

Favorite Artist Alert

Sat Favorites Browse

Sat Favorites Artist

Sat Favorites Replay

MULTIMEDIA

216

Replay Option Option Description

Play/Pause Press to pause content playback. Press “Pause/Play” again to resume playback.

Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to rewind continuously, then release to begin

playing content at that point.

Fast Forward/FW Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast Forward/FW can only be used when content

has been previously rewound.

Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your content lags the live channel.

Live Resumes playback of live content at any time while replaying rewound content.

217

SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect 430N

Only)

NOTE:

SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,

sold separately after the five year trial sub-

scription included with your vehicle purchase

and is ONLY available in the United States.

SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful

information into your vehicle, right to your

fingertips.

• To access Travel Link, push the MENU

button on the faceplate, then the “Travel

Link” button on the touchscreen.

1 – Favorites

View and store your favorite

location, theater and sport

teams for quick access.

2 – Forecast

View detailed weather condi-

tions, forecasts and ski/

snowboarding conditions at

resorts.

3 – Ski Info

View ski and snowboarding

conditions at ski resorts.

4 – Fuel Prices

View detailed price informa-

tion for fuel stations.

5 – Movies

View information on movies

that are playing at theaters.

6 – Sports

View sports scores and up-

coming events for all major

sports.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and

may be equipped with both wired and wire-

less networks. These networks allow your

vehicle to send and receive information. This

information allows systems and features in

your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain

security features to reduce the risk of unau-

thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-

tems and wireless communications. Vehicle

software technology continues to evolve over

time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-

pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps

as needed. Similar to a computer or other

devices, your vehicle may require software

updates to improve the usability and perfor-

mance of your systems or to reduce the po-

tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-

cess to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access

to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if

the most recent version of vehicle software

(such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all

of the possible outcomes if your vehi-

cle’s systems are breached. It may be

possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be im-

paired or a loss of vehicle control could

SiriusXM Travel Link

MULTIMEDIA

218

WARNING!

occur that may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,

or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a

trusted source. Media of unknown origin

could possibly contain malicious soft-

ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it

may increase the possibility for vehicle

systems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual

vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to

your nearest authorized dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you di-

rectly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security

and minimize the potential risk of a secu-

rity breach, vehicle owners should:

– Routinely check

www.driveuconnect.com/

software-update

to learn about available Uconnect soft-

ware updates.

– Only connect and use trusted media

devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,

USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-

cations cannot be assured. Third parties may

unlawfully intercept information and private

communications without your consent. For

further information, refer to “Onboard Diag-

nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in

your Owner’s Manual on

jeep.com/en/owners/manuals.

TIPS CONTROLS AND

GENERAL INFORMATION

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

The remote sound system controls are lo-

cated on the rear surface of the steering

wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the

switches.

Right Switch

• Push the switch up or down to increase or

decrease the volume.

• Push the button in the center to change

modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.

Left Switch

• Push the switch up or down to search for

the next listenable station or select the

next or previous CD track.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Rearview

Of Steering Wheel)

219

• Push the button in the center to select the

next preset station (radio) or to change

CDs if equipped with a CD Player.

Reception Conditions

Reception conditions change constantly

while driving. Reception may be interfered

with by the presence of mountains, buildings

or bridges, especially when you are far away

from the broadcaster.

The volume may be increased when receiving

traffic alerts and news.

Care And Maintenance

Observe the following precautions to ensure

the system is fully operational:

• The display lens should not come into

contact with pointed or rigid objects which

could damage its surface; use a soft, dry

anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.

• Never use alcohol, petrols and derivatives

to clean the display lens.

• Prevent any liquid from entering the sys-

tem: this could damage it beyond repair.

Anti-theft Protection

The system is equipped with an anti-theft

protection system based on the exchange of

information with the electronic control unit

(Body Computer) on the vehicle.

This guarantees maximum safety and pre-

vents the secret code from being entered

after the power supply has been discon-

nected.

If the check has a positive outcome, the

system will start to operate, whereas if the

comparison codes are not the same or if the

electronic control unit (Body Computer) is

replaced, the system will ask the user to enter

the secret code according to the procedure

described in the paragraph below.

Entering The Secret Code

When the system is switched on, if the code

is requested, the display will show "Please

enter Anti-Theft Code" followed by the screen

showing a keypad to enter the secret code.

The secret code has four numbers from 0 to

9: to insert the code numbers, rotate the

BROWSE/ENTER dial and press to confirm.

After entering the fourth number the system

will start functioning.

If an incorrect code is entered, the system

displays "Incorrect Code" to notify the user of

the need to enter the correct code.

After the three available attempts to enter the

code, the system displays "Incorrect Code.

Radio locked. Wait for 30 minutes". After the

text has disappeared it is possible to start the

code entering procedure again.

Vehicle Radio Passport

This document certifies ownership of the

system. The vehicle radio passport shows the

system model, serial number and secret

code.

In case you lose the radio passport, please go

to Jeep Assistance Network with an ID and

the vehicle papers.

Keep the vehicle radio passport in a safe

place so that you can give the information to

the relevant authorities if the system is sto-

len.

MULTIMEDIA

220

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL —

IF EQUIPPED

There are many ways to play music from

MP3 players or USB devices through your

vehicle's sound system.

The remote USB port, located in the glove

box, allows you to connect an AUX/USB into

the vehicle's sound system.

• Non-Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio

from devices connected to the USB port,

push the “AUX” button on the radio face-

plate.

• Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from

devices connected to the USB port, push

the MEDIA button on the faceplate, then

press the “AUX” or “iPod” button on the

touchscreen.

When connected to this feature:

• The AUX/USB can be controlled using the

radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the

external devices contents.

• The AUX/USB battery charges when

plugged into the USB port (if supported by

the specific audio device).

• Compatible iPod devices may also be con-

trollable using voice commands.

NOTE:

The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic,

Nano, Touch, and iPhone devices. The USB

port also supports playing music from com-

patible external USB Mass Storage Class

memory devices. Refer to

UconnectPhone.com website for a list of

tested iPods. Some iPod software versions

may not fully support the USB port features.

Please visit Apple’s website for iPod software

updates.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod or

external device while driving. Failure to

follow this warning could result in a colli-

sion.

BLUETOOTH STREAMING

AUDIO

If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,

your Bluetooth-equipped iPod devices, cell

phones or other media players, may also be

able to stream music to your vehicle's speak-

AUX/USB/MP3 Control

221

ers. Your connected device must be

Bluetooth-compatible, and paired with your

radio (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in-

structions).

Non-Touchscreen Radios: Push the “AUX”

button on the radio faceplate until “BT” or

“Audio Streaming” is displayed on the radio

screen.

Touchscreen-Radios: Push the RADIO/MEDIA

or MEDIA button on the faceplate and then

press the “AUX” button on the touchscreen.

UCONNECT PHONE

The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,

hands-free, in-vehicle communications sys-

tem with Voice Command Capability that al-

lows you to dial a phone number with your

mobile phone using simple voice commands

(see Voice Command section).

• To determine if your vehicle is equipped

with Uconnect Phone, push the

“Uconnect Phone” button

located

on the radio faceplate. If your vehicle has

this feature, you will hear a voice prompt.

If not, you will see a message on the radio

“Uconnect Phone not available.”

NOTE:

To access the tutorial, push the “Uconnect

Phone” button

. After the BEEP, say

“tutorial.” Push any button on the faceplate,

or press any button on the touchscreen, to

cancel the tutorial.

• Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multime-

dia” in your Owner's Manual on

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for fur-

ther details.

NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile

phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-

Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. For

Uconnect Customer Support: U.S. residents -

visit UconnectPhone.com or call

1-877-855-8400. Canadian residents - visit

UconnectPhone.com or call,

1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French). This site will

provide specific instructions based on the

type of mobile phone being paired.

Phone Pairing

NOTE:

Pairing is a one - time initial setup before

using the phone. Prior to starting the pairing

procedure ensure all additional phones

within the vehicle have their Bluetooth dis-

abled.

1. Activate Bluetooth on the mobile phone

you are pairing.

2. Push the “Phone”

button.

3. Wait for the “ready” prompt and BEEP.

4. After the BEEP, say ”setup” or “Uconnect

device setup.”

Bluetooth Streaming Audio

MULTIMEDIA

222

5. After the BEEP, say “device pairing.”

6. After the BEEP, say “pair a device.”

7. Follow the audible prompts.

• You will be asked to say a four-digit Per-

sonal Identification Number (PIN), which

you will later need to enter into your mo-

bile phone. You can say any four-digit PIN.

You will not need to remember this PIN

after the initial pairing process.

• You will then be prompted to give the

phone pairing a name (each phone paired

should have a unique name).

• Next you will be asked to give this new

pairing a priority of 1 through 7 (up to

seven phones may be paired); 1 is the

highest and 7 is the lowest priority. The

system will only connect to the highest

priority phone that exists within the prox-

imity of the vehicle.

• You will then need to start the pairing

procedure on your cell phone. Follow the

Bluetooth instructions in your cell phone

Owner's Manual to complete the phone

pairing setup.

Phonebook

Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook

Transfer From Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by

your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically

downloads names (text names) and number

entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.

Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book

Access Profile may support this feature. Au-

tomatic Transfer is indicated by a green arrow

at the bottom of the screen. See

UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.

• Automatic download and update, if sup-

ported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth

wireless phone connection is made to the

Uconnect Phone. For example, after you

start the vehicle.

NOTE:

The mobile phone may require authorization

prior to download.

• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone

will be downloaded and updated every

time a phone is connected to the

Uconnect Phone.

Mobile Phone Pairing

Uconnect myPhone

223

• Depending on the maximum number of

entries downloaded, there may be a short

delay before the latest downloaded names

can be used. Until then, if available, the

previously downloaded phonebook is

available for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently con-

nected mobile phone is accessible.

• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is

downloaded. The SIM card phonebook is

not part of the Mobile phonebook.

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be

edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.

These can only be edited on the mobile

phone. The changes are transferred and

updated to Uconnect Phone on the next

phone connection.

Making A Phone Call

• Push the “Phone” button .

• After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a

name).

• After the BEEP, say number (or name).

Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)

• When an incoming call rings/is announced

on Uconnect, push the “Phone” button

• To end a call, push the “Phone” button

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During

Call

• During a call, push the “Voice Command”

button

• After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute

off”).

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset

And Vehicle

• During a call, push the “Voice Command”

button

• After the BEEP, say “transfer call.”

Changing The Volume

• Start a dialogue by pushing the “Phone”

button

, then adjust the volume dur-

ing a normal call.

• Use the radio ON/OFF VOLUME rotary

knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable

level while the Uconnect system is speak-

ing. Please note the volume setting for

Uconnect is different than the audio

system.

WARNING!

• Any voice commanded system should be

used only in safe driving conditions fol-

lowing applicable laws regarding phone

use. Your attention should be focused on

safely operating the vehicle. Failure to

do so may result in a collision causing

you and others to be severely injured or

killed.

• In an emergency, to use Uconnect

Phone, your mobile phone must be:

• turned on

• paired to Uconnect Phone

• have network coverage

MULTIMEDIA

224

UCONNECT VOICE

COMMAND

Voice Command Operation

The Uconnect Voice Command system allows

you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite

radio, disc player, HDD, Uconnect Phone, a

memo recorder, and supported portable me-

dia devices.

• When you push the “Voice Command”

button

located on the radio face-

plate or steering wheel, you will hear a

beep. The beep is your signal to give a

command. If you do not say a command

within a few seconds, the system will pres-

ent you with a list of options. If you ever

want to interrupt the system while it lists

options, push the “Voice Command” but-

ton

, listen for the BEEP, and say

your command.

NOTE:

U.S. residents visit driveuconnect.com for

more info on which voice command features

apply to your vehicle. Canadian residents

visit driveuconnect.ca for more info on which

voice command features apply to your ve-

hicle.

• Start a dialogue by pushing the “Voice

Command” button

, you will hear a

beep. The beep is your signal to give a

command. Below are a list of voice com-

mands for each of the different modes:

While In: Voice Command Example:

Main Menu

“Radio AM” (to switch to the AM radio mode)

“Radio FM” (to switch to the FM radio mode)

“Satellite Radio” (to switch to the Satellite radio mode)

“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)

“USB” (to switch to the USB mode)

“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to the Bluetooth Streaming mode)

“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)

“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)

225

While In: Voice Command Example:

Radio Mode

“Frequency” (to change the frequency)

“Next Station” (to select the next station)

“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode

“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)

“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)

“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)

"Channel Name" (to change the channel by its spoken name)

“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)

“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Disc Mode

“Track” (#) (to change the track)

“Next Track” (to play the next track)

“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

MULTIMEDIA

226

While In: Voice Command Example:

Memo Mode

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” The following are common voice commands for

this mode: “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may push the Voice

Command button

to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

— “Save” (to save the memo)

— “Continue” (to continue recording)

— “Delete” (to delete the recording)

— “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may push the Voice

Command button

to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following com-

mands:

— “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

— “Next” (to play the next memo)

— “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

— “Delete” (to delete a memo)

— “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

227

Voice Text Reply

If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,

your Uconnect 430N radio may be able to

play incoming Short Message Service (SMS)

messages (text messages) through the vehi-

cle's sound system. It also allows you to

respond by selecting from various predefined

phrases.

NOTE:

Not all phones are compatible with this fea-

ture. Refer to the phone compatibility list at

UconnectPhone.com. Connected mobile

phones must be bluetooth-compatible and

paired with your radio.

• Push the “Voice Command” button

and after the BEEP, say “SMS” to get

started.

NOTE:

To access the tutorial, push the “Voice Com-

mand” button

. After the BEEP, say

“tutorial.” Push any button on the faceplate

or press any button on the touchscreen to

cancel the tutorial.

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be

used only in safe driving conditions follow-

WARNING!

ing applicable laws regarding phone use.

Your attention should be focused on safely

operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may

result in a collision causing you and others

to be severely injured or killed.

MULTIMEDIA

228

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING

SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . .230

Prepare For The Appointment.......230

Prepare A List ................230

Be Reasonable With Requests ......230

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .230

FCA US LLC Customer Center ......231

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .231

In Mexico Contact ..............231

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .231

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)........231

Service Contract ..............231

WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .232

MOPARPARTS .............232

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

. .232

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C. ..............232

In Canada...................233

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .233

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

229

SUGGESTIONS FOR

OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure

to have the right papers with you. Take your

warranty folder. All work to be performed may

not be covered by the warranty. Discuss ad-

ditional charges with the service manager.

Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's

service history. This can often provide a clue

to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems

or the specific work you want done. If you've

had an accident or work done that is not on

your maintenance log, let the service advisor

know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must

have your vehicle by the end of the day,

discuss the situation with the service advisor

and list the items in order of priority. At many

authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need

a rental, it is advisable to make these ar-

rangements when you call for an appoint-

ment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer

are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We

want you to be happy with our products and

services.

Warranty service must be done by an autho-

rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you

take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They

know your vehicle the best, and are most

concerned that you get prompt and high

quality service. The manufacturer's autho-

rized dealer have the facilities, factory-

trained technicians, special tools, and the

latest information to ensure the vehicle is

fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an

authorized dealer service manager first. Most

matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satis-

fied, talk to the general manager or owner

of the authorized dealer. They want to know

if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve

the concern, you may contact the manu-

facturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's

customer center should include the following

information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number (home and of-

fice)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

230

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 247-9753

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)

387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Ser-

vices LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing diffi-

culties, the manufacturer has installed spe-

cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the

Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any

hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional tele-

typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can

communicate with the manufacturer by dial-

ing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties

that require assistance can use the special

needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.

For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for

Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con-

nect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract

for a vehicle to help protect you from the high

cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac-

turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.

The manufacturer stands behind only the

manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-

chased a manufacturer's service contract,

you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner

Identification Card in the mail within three

weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have

any questions about the service contract, call

the manufacturer's Service Contract National

Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca-

nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng-

lish / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any

service contract that is not the manufactur-

er's service contract. It is not responsible for

any service contract other than the manufac-

turer's service contract. If you purchased a

service contract that is not a manufacturer's

231

service contract, and you require service after

the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty expires, please refer to the contract

documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major

investment when you purchased the vehicle.

An authorized dealer has also made a major

investment in facilities, tools, and training to

assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be

pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve

any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-

gines only), some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain, or

emit, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

WARNING!

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, lo-

cated in the owner’s information kit, for the

terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran-

ties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and acces-

sories are available from an authorized

dealer. They are recommended for your ve-

hicle in order to help keep the vehicle oper-

ating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington,

D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect that could cause a crash or

cause injury or death, you should im-

mediately inform the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA

US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in in-

dividual problems between you, your

authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

232

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to http://

www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administra-

tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You

can also obtain other information about mo-

tor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

safety defect, you should contact the

Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish

to report a safety defect to the Cana-

dian government should contact

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De-

fect Investigations and Recalls at

1-800-333-0510 or go to http://

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER

FORMS

• If you are the first registered retail owner

of your vehicle, you may obtain a compli-

mentary printed copy of the Owner's

Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or

Warranty Booklet. United States custom-

ers may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at

www.jeep.com Scroll to the bottom of the

page and select the “Contact Us” link,

then select the “Owner’s Manual and

Glove Compartment Material” from the

left menu. You may also obtain a compli-

mentary copy by calling 1-877-426-5337

(U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada).

• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you

prefer, additional printed copies of the

Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Ra-

dio Manuals may be purchased by visiting

www.techauthority.com or by calling

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or

1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master

Card, American Express and Discover or-

ders are accepted. If you prefer mailing

your order, please call the above numbers

for an order form.

NOTE:

• A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-

tronic files are also available on the

Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT

websites.

• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select

“Owner/Service Manuals”, then select

your desired model year and vehicle from

the drop down lists.

233

234

Adding Fuel .................133

Adding Washer Fluid ............172

Additives, Fuel................194

Adjust

Down ....................20

Forward ...................20

Rearward ..................20

Up......................20

AirBag.....................96

Air Bag Operation .............98

Air Bag Warning Light ..........95

Enhanced Accident Response

. .102, 164

Event Data Recorder (EDR) ......164

If A Deployment Occurs ........102

Knee Impact Bolsters ..........98

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .103

Side Air Bags ...............98

Transporting Pets ............115

Air Bag Light............55, 95, 116

Air Bag Maintenance ............103

Air Conditioner Maintenance .......177

Air Conditioning ................31

Air Conditioning Controls ..........31

Air Conditioning Filter.........40, 177

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . .40, 41

Air Conditioning Refrigerant........177

Air Conditioning System .....31, 38, 177

Alarm (Security Alarm)............56

Alarm System (Security Alarm) .......15

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........194

Capacities ................194

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......70

Anti-Lock Warning Light ...........59

Assist, Hill Start................72

Audio Jack ...........201, 205, 209

Audio Settings ............201, 203

Automatic Dimming Mirror .........25

Automatic Door Locks ............17

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .38

Automatic Transaxle .............13

Fluid Level Check ...........176

Automatic Transmission ......124, 126,

175, 176

Fluid And Filter Changes . . . .175, 177

Fluid Level Check ...........175

Fluid Type .........175, 176, 196

Special Additives ........175, 176

Autostick................126, 128

Axle Fluid...................196

Battery .....................56

Charging System Light .........56

Belts, Seat ..................116

B-Pillar Location ..............182

Brake Assist System .............71

Brake Fluid ..................196

Brake,

Parking ...............

.122

Brakes.....................192

Brake System .............173, 192

Master Cylinder .............173

Parking ..................122

Warning Light ...............55

Brake/Transmission Interlock .......126

Bulb Replacement .............140

Bulbs, Light ..............118, 140

Camera, Rear ................131

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)

. .194

Capacities, Fluid ..............194

Caps, Filler

Fuel ....................133

Oil (Engine) ...........170, 171

Carbon Monoxide Warning .........115

Cargo Area Cover ...............47

Cargo Area Features .............47

INDEX

235

Cargo Compartment .............47

Light ....................47

Cargo Light...................47

Cargo Load Floor ...............47

Cargo Tie-Downs................47

Car Washes ..................188

CD (Compact Disc) Player .....201, 204

Center High Mounted Stop Light .....141

Certification Label .............134

Chains, Tire..................186

Changing A Flat Tire .........144, 179

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator

Light) ....................67

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .115

Checks, Safety ................115

Child Restraint................104

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ..............106

Child Restraints .............104

Child Seat Installation .........113

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat

Belt ....................111

Infants And Child Restraints .....105

Lower Anchors And Tethers For

Children .................108

Older Children And Child Restraints

. .106

Seating Positions ............107

Child Safety Locks ..............17

Cleaning

Wheels ..................185

Climate Control ................31

Clock Setting..........201, 203, 207

Clutch .....................173

Clutch Fluid .................173

Cold Weather Operation ..........121

Compass ....................61

Connector

UCI ....................221

Universal Consumer Interface

(UCI) ...................221

Contract, Service ..............231

Coolant (Antifreeze).............194

Cooling System ...............172

Coolant Level ..............172

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .195

Customer Assistance ............230

Dealer Service ................178

Defroster, Windshield............116

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .........29

Diagnostic System, Onboard ........66

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .........27

Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear

Doors ....................17

Door Locks .................16

KeyFob...................16

Remote ...................16

Remote Keyless Entry ..........16

Door Locks, Automatic ............17

Downshifting .................124

Driver's Seat Back Tilt ............19

Electric Remote Mirrors ...........26

Electronic Brake Control System ......71

Anti-Lock Brake System ........70

Electronic Roll Mitigation .......76

Traction Control System ........73

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise

Control) ..................129

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....73

Electronic Throttle Control Warning

Light .....................57

Emergency, In Case Of

Jacking ..............144, 179

Jump Starting ..............157

owing .................

.163

INDEX

236

Emission Control System Maintenance . .67

Engine .................170, 171

Break-In Recommendations .....121

Checking Oil Level ...........172

Coolant (Antifreeze) .......172, 195

Cooling ..................172

Exhaust Gas Caution ..........115

Jump Starting ..............157

Oil .................194, 195

Oil Filler Cap ...........170, 171

Overheating ...............160

Enhanced Accident Response

Feature ...............102, 164

Exhaust Gas Caution ............115

Exhaust System ...............115

Exterior Lights .............26, 118

Filters

Air Conditioning ..........40, 177

Engine Oil ................195

Flashers

Hazard Warning .............140

Turn Signal .........60, 118, 141

Flooded Engine Starting ..........121

Fluid, Brake .................196

Fluid Capacities ...............194

Fluid Leaks ..................118

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transaxle ..........176

Automatic Transmission ........175

Cooling System .............172

Fog Lights ................27, 141

Folding Rear Seat ...............21

Four-Way Hazard Flasher..........140

Four Wheel Drive ..............129

Systems .................129

Four Wheel Drive Operation ........129

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..........161

Fuel ......................193

Adding ..................133

Additives .................194

Capacity .................194

Filler

Cap

(Gas Cap) ..........133

Gasoline .................193

Light ....................59

Materials Added ............194

Octane Rating ..........193, 195

Tank Capacity ..............194

Fueling ....................133

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . .48, 50

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .......67, 133

Gasoline (Fuel) ............193, 194

Gear Select Lever Override ........161

GPS Navigation (Uconnect GPS) .....214

GVWR .....................134

Hazard Warning Flasher ..........140

Headlights ..................141

High Beam/Low Beam Select

Switch ...................27

On With Wipers ...........28, 30

Passing ..................27

Replacing ................141

Switch ...................26

Head Restraints ................22

Heated Mirrors.................26

Heated Seats..................20

Heater......................31

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)

Switch ....................27

Hill Descent Control .............77

Hill Start Assist ................72

HomeLink

Operation ..................50

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .48, 50

Hood Release .................45

Ignition .....................13

Key .....................13

Ignition Key Removal.............13

237

Inside Rearview Mirror ............25

Instrument Cluster ..............60

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....189

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . .142

Interior And Instrument Lights .......28

Interior Appearance Care .........189

Interior Lights .................28

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....29

Introduction ...................1

Inverter Outlet (115V) ............52

Inverter, Power ................52

iPod/USB/MP3 Control

Bluetooth Streaming Audio ......221

Jacking Instructions ............146

Jack Location ................145

Jack Operation .........144, 146, 179

Jump Starting ................157

Key-In Reminder ...............14

Keys .......................13

Lane Change And Turn Signals ......141

Lane Change Assist..............27

Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............86

Latches ....................118

Hood ....................45

Leaks, Fluid .................118

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......31

Light Bulbs ..............118, 140

Lights .....................118

AirBag .............55, 95, 116

Back-Up .................141

Brake Assist Warning ..........75

Brake Warning ..............55

Cargo ....................47

Center Mounted Stop .........141

Cruise ...................61

Daytime Running ............26

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .......27

Exterior ..................118

Fog .................27, 141

Hazard Warning Flasher ........140

Headlights .................26

Headlights On With Wipers . . . .28, 30

Headlight Switch .............26

High Beam ................

High Beam/Low Beam Select .....27

Instrument Cluster ............26

Interior ...................28

License ..................141

Lights On Reminder ...........28

Low Fuel ..................59

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)

.57

Map Reading ...............28

Park ....................60

Seat Belt Reminder ...........55

Security Alarm ...........15, 56

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .57

Traction Control .............75

Turn Signal .......27, 60, 118, 141

Warning (Instrument Cluster

Description) ................60

Loading Vehicle ...............134

Tires ...................182

Locks ......................16

Automatic Door ..............17

Child Protection .............17

Door ....................16

Power Door ................17

Lug Nuts ...................193

Lumbar Support................19

Maintenance Schedule ...........166

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check

Engine) .................57, 67

Manual, Service ...............233

Manual Transmission ............174

Fluid Level Check ...........174

Frequency Of Fluid Change .....174

Lubricant Selection .......174, 196

INDEX

238

Map/Reading Lights .............28

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..........173

Media Center Radio.............206

Mini-Trip Computer ..............61

Mirrors .....................25

Automatic Dimming ...........25

Electric Powered .............26

Heated ...................26

Rearview ..................25

Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......77

MOPAR Accessories.............196

MOPAR Parts.................232

Navigation ..................212

Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . .213

Navigation Voice Prompt Volume .....212

New Vehicle Break-In Period .......121

Occupant Restraints .............83

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ......193

Oil, Engine...............194, 195

Capacity .................194

Checking .................172

Filter ...................195

Pressure Warning Light .........56

Recommendation ............194

Oil Pressure Light ...............56

Onboard Diagnostic System .........66

Operating Precautions ............66

Outlet

Power ...................50

Overheating, Engine ............160

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .233

Parking Brake ................122

Passing Light .................27

Personal Settings ...............65

Pets ......................115

Phone (Uconnect) ..............222

Placard, Tire And Loading Information .182

Power

Door Locks ................17

Inverter ..................52

Mirrors ...................26

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . .50

Sunroof ..................43

Windows ..................42

Power Seats

Down ....................20

Forward ...................20

Rearward ..................

Tilt......................20

Up ......................20

Power Steering Fluid ............196

Power Transfer Unit .............196

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts......91

Preparation For Jacking ..........146

Pretensioners

Seat Belts .................92

Programmable Electronic Features ....65

Radio

Presets ...........201, 203, 208

Radio 130

Operating Instructions Radio

Mode ...................200

Radio 130 With Satellite Radio

Operating Instructions Radio

Mode ...................202

Radio Operation ...........201, 203

Rear Camera .................131

Rear Seat, Folding ..............21

Rearview Mirrors ...............25

Rear Wiper/Washer ..............31

Recreational Towing.............137

Refrigerant ..................177

Reminder, Seat Belt .............85

Remote Control

Security Alarm ..............15

Remote Sound System (Radio)

Controls ..................219

239

Remote Starting System ...........15

Replacement Bulbs .............140

Reporting Safety Defects .........232

Restraint, Head ................22

Restraints, Child ..............104

Retractable Cargo Area Cover ........47

Roll Over Warning ...............2

Rotation, Tires ................186

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......116

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......117

Safety Defects, Reporting .........232

Safety, Exhaust Gas.............115

Safety Information, Tire ..........179

Safety Tips ..................115

Satellite Radio (Uconnect Studios) . . .204

Schedule, Maintenance ..........166

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage .................88

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . .92

Energy Management Feature ......92

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ......87

Lap/Shoulder Belts ............86

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....88

Pregnant Women .............91

Seat Belt Extender ............91

Seat Belt Pretensioner .........92

Seat Belt Reminder ...........85

Seat Belt Maintenance ...........189

Seat Belt Reminder..............85

Seat Belts ................84, 116

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........88

Adjustable Upper Shoulder

Anchorage .................88

Child Restraint .............104

Extender ..................91

Front Seat ............84, 86, 87

Inspection ................116

Operating Instructions .........87

Pregnant Women .............91

Pretensioners ...............92

Rear Seat .................86

Reminder .................55

Untwisting Procedure ..........88

Seats ....................18, 20

Adjustment .............18, 20

Heated ...................

Lumbar Support .............19

Rear Folding ...............21

Seatback Release ............19

Tilting ...................19

Security Alarm ..............15, 56

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....195

Service Assistance .............230

Service Contract ...............231

Service Manuals ...............233

Settings, Personal ..............65

Shift Lever Override.............161

Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . .124

Shoulder Belts.................86

Signals, Turn ...........60, 118, 141

SIRIUS Travel Link .............214

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .........186

Spare Tire...................145

Spark Plugs .................195

Speed Control

Accel/Decel ...............131

Cancel ..................130

Resume .................130

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......129

Starting ....................120

Automatic Transmission ........120

Cold Weather ..............121

Engine Fails To Start .........121

Manual Transmission .........120

Remote ..................15

Starting Procedures.............120

Steering.....................24

Tilt Column ................24

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......219

INDEX

240

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls ..................219

Storage ....................188

Storage, Vehicle ................40

Stuck, Freeing ................161

Sunroof

Closing ...................44

Opening ...................44

Sun Roof ....................43

Supplemental Restraint System -

AirBag....................96

System, Remote Starting ..........15

Taillights ...................141

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .38

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo............47

Tilt

Down ....................20

Up ......................20

Tilt Steering Column .............24

Tire And Loading Information Placard . .182

Tire Markings.................179

Tires...................117, 186

Chains ..................186

Changing .............144, 179

Jacking ..............144, 179

Load Capacity ..............182

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .77

Pressure Warning Light .........57

Quality Grading .............186

Rotation .................186

Safety ..................179

Spare Tire ................145

Tire Safety Information ...........179

Tire Service Kit ........152, 153, 154,

155, 156, 157

Touchscreen Radio

Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio . .212

Towing .....................136

Disabled Vehicle ............163

Guide ...................136

Recreational ...............137

Weight ..................136

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .137

Traction Control ................73

Trailer Towing ................136

Trailer Towing Guide ............136

Trailer Weight ................136

ransaxle

Automatic .................

Transmission

Automatic ......124, 126, 175, 176

Fluid ............175, 176, 196

Transporting Pets ..............115

Trip Computer .................61

Turn Signals ............27, 60, 141

UCI Connector ................221

Uconnect Voice Command.........225

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........186

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)

Connector .................221

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ......88

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . .192

Vehicle Loading............134, 182

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm)

. .15

Vehicle Storage .............40, 188

Voice Command ...............225

Voice Prompt Volume

Navigation ................212

Volume

Navigation Voice Prompt ........212

Warning, Roll Over ...............2

Warranty Information ............232

Washer

Adding Fluid ..............172

Washers, Windshield .............30

Washing Vehicle ...............188

Wheel And Wheel Trim ...........185

241

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care........185

Wind Buffeting ................44

Window Fogging ................40

Windows ....................42

Power ...................42

Windshield Defroster ............116

Windshield Washers ...........29, 30

Windshield Wiper Blades .........178

Windshield Wipers ..............29

Wiper Blade Replacement .........178

Wipers, Intermittent .............29

INDEX

242

NOTES

243

NOTES

244

NOTES

245

NOTES

246

NOTES

247

NOTES

248

If you are the ﬁrst registered retail

owner of your vehicle, you may

obtain a complimentary printed copy

of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/

Uconnect Manuals or Warranty

Booklets by calling 1 877 426-5337

(U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada)

or by contacting your dealer.

The driver’s primary responsibility is

the safe operation of the vehicle.

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, resulting in a

collision and personal injury. FCA US

LLC strongly recommends that the

driver use extreme caution when

using any device or feature that may

take their attention o the road.

Use of any electrical devices, such

as cellular telephones, computers,

portable radios, vehicle navigation

or other devices, by the driver

while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous and could lead to a

serious collision. Texting while

driving is also dangerous and

should never be done while the

vehicle is moving.

If you ﬁnd yourself unable to

devote your full attention to vehicle

operation, pull o the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

Some states or provinces prohibit

the use of cellular telephones or

texting while driving. It is always

the driver’s responsibility to comply

with all local laws.

Important:

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the

important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,

Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be

found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website

on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you ﬁnd it

useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement DVD kits by

visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can

purchase replacement DVD kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.

This guide has been prepared to help you

get quickly acquainted with your new Jeep

brand vehicle and to provide a convenient

reference source for common questions.

However, it is not a substitute for your

Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions,

maintenance procedures and important

safety messages, please consult your

Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect

manuals found on the website on the back

cover and other Warning Labels

in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide

may apply to your vehicle. For additional

information on accessories to help

personalize your vehicle, visit

www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca

(Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.

Driving and Alcohol:

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your

driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below

the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated

non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less

sharp, your reﬂexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

2667646_17c_Patriot_UG_082616.indd 2 8/26/16 2:07 PM

2017 PATRIOT USER GUIDE

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the

Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:

www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or

www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);

www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).

Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Whether it’s providing

information about speciﬁc

product features, taking a

tour through your vehicle’s

heritage, knowing what

steps to take following an accident,

or scheduling your next appointment,

we know you’ll ﬁnd the app an

important extension of your Jeep

brand vehicle. Simply download the

app, select your make and model and

enjoy the ride. To get this app, go

directly to the App Store or Google

Play and enter the search keyword

“JEEP” (U.S. market only).

jeep.com /en /owners provides

special oers tailored to your

needs, customized vehicle galleries,

personalized service records and

more. To get this information, just

create an account and check

back often.

17MK74-926-AA

Patriot

Third Edition

User Guide

2667646_17c_Patriot_UG_082616.indd 1 8/26/16 2:07 PM